2005 HUMMER H2 Owner Manual M - gm.ca - General · PDF file2005 HUMMER H2 Owner Manual M....

Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1Front Seats ............................................... 1-2Rear Seats ............................................... 1-7Safety Belts ............................................. 1-16Child Restraints ....................................... 1-36Airbag System ......................................... 1-58Restraint System Check ............................ 1-69

Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1Keys ........................................................ 2-3Doors and Locks ....................................... 2-8Windows ................................................. 2-17Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-21Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-24Mirrors .................................................... 2-40OnStar® System ...................................... 2-45HomeLink® Wireless Control System ........... 2-47Storage Areas ......................................... 2-51Sunroof .................................................. 2-59Vehicle Personalization ............................. 2-61

Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4Climate Controls ...................................... 3-20Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ........ 3-26Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 3-43Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-60

Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..... 4-2Towing ................................................... 4-64

Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1Service ..................................................... 5-3Fuel ......................................................... 5-5Checking Things Under the Hood ................. 5-9All-Wheel Drive ........................................ 5-43Rear Axle ............................................... 5-44Front Axle ............................................... 5-44Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-45Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-51Tires ...................................................... 5-52Appearance Care ..................................... 5-90Vehicle Identification ................................. 5-99Electrical System .................................... 5-100Capacities and Specifications ................... 5-110

Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2

Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1Customer Assistance and Information ........... 7-2Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-10

Index ................................................................ 1

2005 HUMMER H2 Owner Manual M

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, HUMMER,the name HUMMER, H2 and the H2 Design areregistered trademarks of General Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at the time itwas printed. We reserve the right to make changesafter that time without further notice. For vehicles firstsold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors ofCanada Limited” for HUMMER whenever it appearsin this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if it isneeded while on the road. If the vehicle is sold, leavethis manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can be obtainedfrom your dealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual from beginning toend when they first receive their new vehicle. If thisis done, it can help you learn about the featuresand controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words worktogether in the owner manual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information about thevehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in the manual and thepage number where it can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 05H2 B First Edition ©2004 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

ii

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in this book. Weuse a box and the word CAUTION to tell about thingsthat could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that could hurtyou or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce thehazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,you or others could be hurt.

You will also find a circlewith a slash through it inthis book. This safetysymbol means “Do Not,”“Do Not do this” or “Do Notlet this happen.”

iii

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is something that coulddamage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damage thevehicle. Many times, this damage would not be coveredby your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. Butthe notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or indifferent words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They usethe same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation or informationrelating to a specific component, control, message,gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference the followingtopics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

iv

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

v

✍ NOTES

vi

Front Seats ......................................................1-2Power Seats ..................................................1-2Power Lumbar ...............................................1-3Heated Seats .................................................1-4Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-5Head Restraints .............................................1-6

Rear Seats .......................................................1-7Heated Seats .................................................1-760/40 Split Bench Seat ...................................1-7Third Row Seat (SUV) ...................................1-10

Safety Belts ...................................................1-16Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-16Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-21How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-22Driver Position ..............................................1-22Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-29Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-30Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-30Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children

and Small Adults .......................................1-33Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-35

Child Restraints .............................................1-36Older Children ..............................................1-36Infants and Young Children ............................1-39Child Restraint Systems .................................1-42

Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-45Top Strap ....................................................1-46Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-47Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-49Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the

LATCH System .........................................1-51Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat

Position ...................................................1-52Securing a Child Restraint in the Right

Front Seat Position ....................................1-54Airbag System ...............................................1-58

Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-60When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-61What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-63How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-63What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-64Airbag Off Switch ..........................................1-65Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-68Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................1-69Restraint System Check ..................................1-69

Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-69Replacing Restraint System Parts After

a Crash ...................................................1-70

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

1-1

Front Seats

Power Seats

The power seat controls are located on the outboardedge of the front seats.

Horizontal Control: This control adjusts the seatcushion.

• Raise or lower the front of the seat by raising orlowering the forward edge of the control. Raiseor lower the rear of the seat by raising or loweringthe rear edge of the control.

• Move the seat forward or rearward by moving thewhole control toward the front or toward the rearof the vehicle.

• Lower or raise the entire seat cushion by movingthe whole control up or down.

Vertical Control: This control adjusts the seatback.

Move the reclining front seatback rearward or forward bymoving the control toward the rear or toward the frontof the vehicle. This adjusts the angle of the seatback.

For more information on the reclining seatbacks,see Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-5.

Your vehicle has a memory function which allows seatsettings to be saved and recalled. See Memory Seaton page 2-61 for more information.

1-2

Power LumbarYour vehicle’s seats have power lumbar.

You can increase ordecrease lumbar supportin an area of the lowerseatback with this control,located on the outboardsides of the front seat(s).

To increase support, press and hold the front of thecontrol. To decrease support, press and hold the rear ofthe control. Let go of the control when the lowerseatback reaches the desired level of support.

You can also reshape the side wing area of the lowerseatback for more lateral support.

To increase support, press and hold the top of thecontrol. To decrease support, press and hold the bottomof the control. Let go of the control when the lowerseatback reaches the desired level of support.

Your vehicle may have a memory function which allowsseat settings to be saved and recalled. See MemorySeat on page 2-61 for more information.

1-3

Heated Seats

Your vehicle may haveheated front seats. Thebuttons used to control thisfeature are located onthe front doors. The enginemust be running for theheated seat featureto work.

To heat the entire seat, press the horizontal button withthe heated seat symbol. Press the button to cyclethrough the temperature settings of high, medium andlow and to turn the heated seat off. Indicator lightswill glow to designate the level of heat selected, threefor high, two for medium, and one for low.

The low setting warms the seatback and cushion untilthe seat temperature is near body temperature. Themedium and high settings heat the seatback and seatcushion to a slightly higher temperature. You will be ableto feel heat in about two minutes.

To heat only the seatback, press the vertical button withthe heated seatback symbol. An indicator light on theseatback button will glow to designate that only theseatback is being heated. Additional presses ofthe seatback button will cycle through the heat levels forthe seatback only. Press the horizontal button againto heat the whole seat.

The heated front seats will shut off automatically whenthe ignition is turned off.

1-4

Reclining SeatbacksYour vehicle’s front seatbacks have a recline featurewhich is described earlier. See Power Seats onpage 1-2.

But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicleis in motion can be dangerous. Even if youbuckle up, your safety belts cannot do theirjob when you are reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,you could go into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crashthe belt could go up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause serious internalinjuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle is inmotion, have the seatback upright. Then sitwell back in the seat and wear your safety beltproperly.

1-5

Head Restraints

Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraintis closest to the top of your head. This positionreduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull straight up on the head restraint to raise it andpush it down to lower it.

The front head restraints can also be tilted forward inaddition to being slid up or down. To tilt either ofthe front head restraints do the following:

Pull the head restraint toward you until you hear a click.Then let go. The head restraint will stay in this positionunless you pull it forward more until another click isheard. There are four positions available: initial position,first click, second click, and third click. After the thirdposition (three clicks) is reached, pulling the headrestraint farther will release it back to the normal uprightposition.

The rear head restraints can be slid up or down just asthe front head restraints, but they do not tilt.

1-6

Rear Seats

Heated Seats

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the buttons usedto control this featureare located on the back ofthe center console. Theengine must be running forthe heated seat featureto work.

To heat the seat, press the button to cycle through thetemperature settings of high and low. Press thebutton a third time to turn the feature off. An indicatorlight will glow for each heat setting when the feature isoperating.

The heated rear seats will shut off automatically whenthe ignition is turned off.

60/40 Split Bench SeatThe 60/40 split bench seats can be folded to give youmore cargo space.

1-7

Folding the SeatbacksThe seatbacks (SUV only) are equipped with rearwardfolding head restraints. When the seatback is beingfolded down, the head restraint will automaticallyfold rearward.

To fold the rear seat, do the following:

1. Make sure that nothing is under or in front ofthe seat.

2. Pull up on the straploop located at the rearof the seat cushionand pull the seatcushion up and fold itforward.

3. Pull the seatback forward and fold it down until itis flat.If the seatback cannot fold flat because it interfereswith the cushion, try moving the front seat forwardand/or bringing the front seatback more upright.

4. Repeat the steps for the other half of the 60/40 splitbench seat.

Returning the Seats to an UprightPosition

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it could moveforward in a sudden stop or crash. That couldcause injury to the person sitting there. Alwayspress rearward on the seatback to be sure it islocked.

1-8

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed, notproperly attached, or twisted will not providethe protection needed in a crash. The personwearing the belt could be seriously injured.After raising the rear seatback, always checkto be sure that the safety belts are properlyrouted and attached, and are not twisted.

To return the seat(s) to the upright position, do thefollowing:

1. Lift the seatback up and push it rearward allthe way.

2. Lower the seat cushion until it latches into position.

3. Pull forward on the seatback and up on the seatcushion to make sure the seat is securely in place.

4. Return the head restraints (SUV only) to the uprightposition.

1-9

Third Row Seat (SUV)

Entering or Exiting the Third Row SeatIf your vehicle has a third row seat, you must foldthe second row seat down before entering or exiting thethird row. See “Folding the Seatbacks” under 60/40Split Bench Seat on page 1-7 earlier in this section forinstructions.

The third row seatback can be folded and the entireseat can be tilted or removed from the vehicle.

Folding the SeatbackTo fold the seatback, do the following:

1. Pull up on the releaselever labeled 1, locatedon the rear of theseatback, and push theseatback forward.

Unfolding the Seatback

{CAUTION:


1-10

To return the seatback to the passenger position, do thefollowing:

1. Pull up on the releaselever labeled 1 andthen pull up onthe seatback until theseatback locks intothe upright position.

2. Push forward on the seatback to make sure it islocked into position.

Tilting the Seat1. Fold the seatback forward using the instructions

listed previously.2. Unlatch the seat from

the floor by pulling upon the lever labeled 2,located on the rearof the seat.

3. Lift the rear of the seat up from the floor and push itforward until it locks into place. You will not be ableto unlatch the seat from the floor unless theseatback is folded down.

The seat will now remain locked in the upright position.

1-11

Returning the Seat from a Tilted to anUpright Position

{CAUTION:


To return the seatback to an upright position, do thefollowing:

1. Pull the lever labeled 3 toward you.

2. While still holding lever 3 toward you, grasp the topof the seat and pull it toward you slightly.

3. Let go of lever 3 and pull the seat completely down.

4. Push down on the seat firmly. Try pulling it up tobe sure it is locked into place.

1-12

5. Pull up on the releaselever labeled 1 andthen pull up onthe seatback until theseatback locks intothe upright position.

Removing the SeatTo remove the seat, do the following:

1. Open the liftgate.2. Fold the seatback

forward onto the seatcushion by usingthe lever labeled 1.The seat cannotbe removed unless theseatback is folded.

1-13

3. To unlatch the rear ofthe seat from the floor,pull up on the releaselever labeled 2, at therear of the seat, and liftthe rear of the seat upfrom the floor.

4. Squeeze the release handle while pulling the seatout of the slots on the floor.

5. While holding the rear of the seat up, roll the seatout of the vehicle.

1-14

Reinstalling the Seat

{CAUTION:


{CAUTION:

A seat that is not locked into place properlycan move around in a collision or sudden stop.People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sureto lock the seat into place properly wheninstalling it.

{CAUTION:


To reinstall the seat, do the following:

1. While holding the rear of the seat up, slide the frontwheels into the slots on the floor. The front latchesshould lock into place. If the latches do not lock,try tilting the rear of the seat upward.

1-15

2. Once the latches are engaged, pull up on the leverlabeled 3 to allow the seat to drop into place.

3. Pull up on the lever labeled 1 to return the seatbackto its upright position.

4. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is lockedinto place. The seatback cannot be raised to theupright position unless the seat is secured tothe floor.

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to use safetybelts properly. It also tells you some things you shouldnot do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or she can notwear a safety belt properly. If you are in acrash and you are not wearing a safety belt,your injuries can be much worse. You can hitthings inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.You can be seriously injured or killed. In thesame crash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,and check that your passengers’ belts arefastened properly too.

1-16

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargoarea, inside or outside of a vehicle. In acollision, people riding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured or killed. Do notallow people to ride in any area of your vehiclethat is not equipped with seats and safetybelts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has a lightthat comes on as areminder to buckle up. SeeSafety Belt ReminderLight on page 3-28.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the lawsays to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do havea crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be soserious that even buckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes are in between. In many ofthem, people who buckle up can survive and sometimeswalk away. Without belts they could have been badlyhurt or killed.

After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, thefacts are clear. In most crashes buckling up doesmatter...a lot!

1-17

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fast asit goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat onwheels.

Put someone on it.

1-18

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The riderdoes not stop.

The person keeps going until stopped by something. Ina real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

1-19

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,and your strongest bones take the forces. That is whysafety belts make such good sense.

1-20

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accidentif I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safetybelt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,even if you are upside down. And your chance ofbeing conscious during and after an accident,so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater ifyou are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have towear safety belts?

A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be inmost of them in the future. But they aresupplemental systems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead of them. Every airbagsystem ever offered for sale has required the use ofsafety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that hasairbags, you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,but especially in side and other collisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far fromhome, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in anaccident — even one that is not your fault — youand your passengers can be hurt. Being a gooddriver does not protect you from things beyond yourcontrol, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) ofhome. And the greatest number of serious injuriesand deaths occur at speeds of less than40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

1-21

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to know aboutsafety belts and children. And there are differentrules for smaller children and babies. If a child will beriding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-36or Infants and Young Children on page 1-39. Followthose rules for everyone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraint systems yourvehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wearit properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To seehow, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, let the beltgo back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 1-35.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-22

5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckleend of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug onthe hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, thisapplies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you wouldbe less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slidunder it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. Theshoulder belt should go over the shoulder and acrossthe chest. These parts of the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

1-23

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder beltis too loose. In a crash, you would moveforward too much, which could increase injury.The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

1-24


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,the belt would go up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not at the pelvicbones. This could cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle your belt into thebuckle nearest you.

1-25


A: The belt is over an armrest.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt goesover an armrest like this. The belt would bemuch too high. In a crash, you can slide underthe belt. The belt force would then be appliedat the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, andthat could cause serious or fatal injuries. Besure the belt goes under the armrests.

1-26


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It shouldbe worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wear theshoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, yourbody would move too far forward, which wouldincrease the chance of head and neck injury.Also, the belt would apply too much force tothe ribs, which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injure internalorgans like your liver or spleen.

1-27


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.In a crash, you would not have the full width ofthe belt to spread impact forces. If a belt istwisted, make it straight so it can workproperly, or ask your dealer to fix it.

1-28

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of theway. If you slam the door on it, you can damageboth the belt and your vehicle.

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likely to beseriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, andthe lap portion should be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is morelikely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. Forpregnant women, as for anyone, the key to makingsafety belts effective is wearing them properly.

1-29

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safetybelt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-22.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works the sameway as the driver’s safety belt — except for onething. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt outall the way, you will engage the child restraint lockingfeature. If this happens, just let the belt go back allthe way and start again.

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers to buckleup! Accident statistics show that unbelted people inthe rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than thosewho are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety belted can bethrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strikeothers in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here ishow to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.Do not let it get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, let the beltgo back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.

1-30

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way andstart again.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 1-35.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckleend of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.

1-31

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug onthe hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, thisapplies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you wouldbe less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slidunder it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. Theshoulder belt should go over the shoulder and acrossthe chest. These parts of the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or acrash. The safety belt also locks if you pull the belt veryquickly out of the retractor.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder beltis too loose. In a crash, you would moveforward too much, which could increase injury.The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.

1-32

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides forChildren and Small AdultsRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide addedsafety belt comfort for older children who have outgrownbooster seats and for some adults. When installed ona shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the beltaway from the neck and head.

Comfort guides are provided for each passenger in thesecond row seat and one guide for the single thirdrow seat.

Here is how to install a comfort guide and use thesafety belt:

1. For the second row, remove the guide from itsstorage clip on the trim panel near the side ofthe seatback. For the third row (SUV only), removethe guide from its storage clip on the side of theseatback.

1-33

2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the twoedges of the belt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.The guide must be on top of the belt.

1-34

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly worn may notprovide the protection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could be seriouslyinjured. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest. These parts ofthe body are best able to take belt restrainingforces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt asdescribed in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-30.Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses theshoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze thebelt edges together so that you can take them out of theguides. For the second row, slide the guide onto itsstorage clip on the trim panel near the side of theseatback. For the third row, slide the guide onto itsstorage clip on the side of the seatback. Make sure youremove the comfort guide from the belt before youfold a rear seat down.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, youshould use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer willorder you an extender. It is free. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, sothe extender will be long enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someone else use it, anduse it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender hasbeen designed for adults. Never use it for securingchild seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see the instruction sheetthat comes with the extender.

1-35

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seats shouldwear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: If possible, an older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint ashoulder belt can provide. The shoulder beltshould not cross the face or neck. The lap beltshould fit snugly below the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severe or evenfatal internal injuries in a crash.

Accident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear seat.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strikeother people who are buckled up, or can be thrownout of the vehicle. Older children need to use safetybelts properly.

1-36

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the same belt.The belt can not properly spread the impactforces. In a crash, the two children can becrushed together and seriously injured. A beltmust be used by only one person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,but the child is so small that the shoulder beltis very close to the child’s face or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position,move the child toward the center of the vehicle.Also, see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guidesfor Children and Small Adults on page 1-33. If thechild is sitting in the center position, move thechild toward the safety belt buckle. In either case,be sure that the shoulder belt still is on thechild’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upperbody would have the restraint that belts provide.

1-37

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears the belt inthis way, in a crash the child might slide underthe belt. The belt’s force would then be appliedright on the child’s abdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, just touchingthe child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’spelvic bones in a crash.

1-38

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! This includesinfants and all other children. Neither the distancetraveled nor the age and size of the traveler changesthe need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,the law in every state in the United States and inevery Canadian province says children up to some agemust be restrained while in a vehicle.

Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,they should have the protection provided by appropriaterestraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’sadult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.Instead, they need to use a child restraint.

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in their armswhile riding in a vehicle. A baby does notweigh much — until a crash. During a crash ababy will become so heavy it is not possible tohold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenlybecome a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’sarms. A baby should be secured in anappropriate restraint.

1-39

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very close to,any airbag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer protection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young children andinfants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt systemnor its airbag system is designed for them.Young children and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

Q: What are the different types of add-on childrestraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by thevehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.Selection of a particular restraint should takeinto consideration not only the child’s weight, height,and age but also whether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motor vehicle in which it willbe used.

1-40

For most basic types of child restraints, there aremany different models available. When purchasing achild restraint, be sure it is designed to be usedin a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have alabel saying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that comewith the restraint state the weight and heightlimitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,there are many kinds of restraints available forchildren with special needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck. Thisis necessary because a newborn infant’s neckis weak and its head weighs so muchcompared with the rest of its body. In a crash,an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into therestraint, so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongest part of aninfant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infantsalways should be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child is quiteunlike that of an adult or older child, for whomthe safety belts are designed. A young child’ship bones are still so small that the vehicle’sregular safety belt may not remain low on thehip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settleup around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, thebelt would apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatal injuries. Youngchildren always should be secured inappropriate child restraints.

1-41

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in amotor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designedto restrain or position a child on a continuous flatsurface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests towardthe center of the vehicle.

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with theseating surface against the back of the infant. Theharness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.

1-42

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint forthe child’s body with the harness and also sometimeswith surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed toimprove the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Somebooster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and somehigh-back booster seats have a five-point harness. Abooster seat can also help a child to see out the window.

1-43

Q: How do child restraints work?

A: A child restraint system is any device designed foruse in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or positionchildren. A built-in child restraint system is apermanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-onchild restraint system is a portable one, whichis purchased by the vehicle’s owner.

For many years, add-on child restraints have usedthe adult belt system in the vehicle. To helpreduce the chance of injury, the child also has to besecured within the restraint. The vehicle’s beltsystem secures the add-on child restraint in thevehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harnesssystem holds the child in place within the restraint.

One system, the three-point harness, has straps thatcome down over each of the infant’s shoulders andbuckle together at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and acrotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low against thechild’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

When choosing a child restraint, be sure the childrestraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, itwill have a label saying that it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You mayfind these instructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system orthe LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child alsohas to be secured within the restraint to help reduce thechance of personal injury. When securing an add-onchild restraint, refer to the instructions that come with therestraint which may be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are not available,obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.

1-44

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We,therefore, recommend that child restraints be securedin a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facinginfant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing childseat and an older child riding in a booster seat.

If you need to secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s seat, there is a switch on the instrumentpanel that you can use to turn off the passenger’sair bag. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-65 andSecuring a Child Restraint in the Right Front SeatPosition on page 1-54, for more on this includingimportant safety information.

Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right frontpassenger seat unless the air bag is off. Here is why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s airbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing child restraintwould be very close to the inflating airbag. Besure to turn off the airbag before using arear-facing child restraint in the right front seatposition.

Even though the airbag off switch is designedto turn off the passenger’s airbag, no systemis fail safe, and no one can guarantee that anairbag will not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off.General Motors recommends that rear-facingchild restraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag is off.

If you secure a forward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as it will go. It isbetter to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

1-45

Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secureany child restraint in your vehicle — even when no childis in it.

Top StrapSome child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.” Itcan help restrain the child restraint during a collision.For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored tothe vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraintsare designed for use with or without the top strap beinganchored. Others require the top strap always to beanchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions foryour child restraint. If yours requires that the top strapbe anchored, do not use the restraint unless it isanchored properly.

If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one canbe obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kitis available.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing childrestraints have a top strap, and that the strap beanchored. In the United States, some child restraintsalso have a top strap. If your child restraint has atop strap, it should be anchored.

Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchorpoints. Be sure to use an anchor point located on thesame side of the vehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will be placed. Raise the headrestraint and route the top strap under it.

1-46

{CAUTION:

Each top tether bracket is designed to anchoronly one child restraint. Attaching more thanone child restraint to a single bracket couldcause the anchor to come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or others could beinjured if this happens. To help prevent injuryto people and damage to your vehicle, attachonly one child restraint per bracket.

Once you have the top strap anchored, you will beready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the topstrap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions say.

Top Strap Anchor LocationA child restraint with a top strap should only be used inthe second row of the SUV or SUT or in the thirdrow of the SUV.

Do not secure a child restraint with a top strap in theright front passenger’s position if a national or local lawrequires that the top strap be anchored, or if theinstructions that come with the child restraint say thatthe top strap must be anchored. There is no placeto anchor the top strap in this position.

Your vehicle has a top strap anchor for each seatingposition in the second row of the SUV or SUT and in theoutboard passenger position in the third row of theSUV. The anchors are located at the bottom rear of theseat cushion.

1-47

In order to get to the anchor for the center seat in thesecond row of an H2 SUT, you may need to foldthe seatback of the rear, passenger-side seat forward.Use the following instructions.

1. Place the child restraint on the center seat.

2. Fold the rear passenger-side seatback forward.

3. Find the top strap anchor at the rear base ofthe center seat and attach the top strap according tothe instructions that came with the child restraint.

Second Row Seats

Third Row Seat

1-48

{CAUTION:


{CAUTION:


4. Return the rear passenger-side seatback to itsupright position. Ensure that the seatback locksand that the safety belt is routed properly.

5. Continue to install the child restraint according tothe instructions that came with the child restraint.

Lower Anchorages and Top Tethersfor Children (LATCH System)Your vehicle has the LATCH system. For the SUV,there are anchors in the center and right side seatingpositions in the second row. For the SUT, there areanchors in the center seating position in the second row.

This system, designed to make installation of childrestraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.Instead, it uses vehicle anchors and child restraintattachments to secure the restraints. Some restraintsalso use another vehicle anchor to secure a toptether strap.

1-49

A. Lower AnchorageB. Lower AnchorageC. Top Tether

A. Lower AnchorageB. Lower Anchorage

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, youneed a child restraint designed for that system.

To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this childrestraint system, each seating position with theLATCH system has visible metal anchors in the seatwhere the seatback meets the seat cushion.

1-50

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attachedto its anchorage points, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injured orkilled. Make sure that a LATCH-type childrestraint is properly installed using theanchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.

Securing a Child Restraint Designedfor the LATCH System

1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seatingposition you want to use, where the bottom of theseatback meets the back of the seat cushion.See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) on page 1-49.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on thechild restraint to the LATCH anchorages in thevehicle. The child restraint instructions will showyou how.

4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.The child restraint instructions will show youhow. Also see Top Strap on page 1-46.

5. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the toptether from the top tether anchorage and thendisconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCHanchorages.

1-51

Securing a Child Restraint in a RearSeat PositionIf your child restraint is equipped with the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) on page 1-49. See Top Strapon page 1-46 if the child restraint has one.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Be sure to follow theinstructions that came with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint when and as theinstructions say.


2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-52

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten thelap portion of the belt and feed the shoulderbelt back into the retractor. If you are using aforward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpfulto use your knee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.


To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way. The safetybelt will move freely again and be ready to work for anadult or larger child passenger.

1-53

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionIf your child restraint is equipped with the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) on page 1-49.

There is no top strap anchor in the right frontpassenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat in thisposition if a national or local law requires that thetop strap be anchored, or if the instructions that comewith the child restraint say that the top strap mustbe anchored. See Top Strap on page 1-46 if your childrestraint has one.

Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag. Thereis a switch on the instrument panel that you canuse to turn off the right front passenger’s airbag. SeeAirbag Off Switch on page 1-65 for more on this,including important safety information.

A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facingchild restraint.

United States Canada

1-54

Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s seat unless the airbag is off. Here is why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s airbag inflates. This is because theback of the rear-facing child restraint would bevery close to the inflating airbag. Be sure to turnoff the airbag before using a rear-facing childrestraint in the right front seat position.

Even though the airbag off switch is designed toturn off the passenger’s airbag, no system is failsafe, and no one can guarantee that an airbagwill not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off.General Motors recommends that rear-facingchild restraints be secured in the rear seat, evenif the airbag is off.

If you secure a forward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as it will go. It isbetter to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light ever comes onwhen you have turned off the airbag, it meansthat something may be wrong with the airbagsystem. The right front passenger’s airbagcould inflate even though the switch is off. Ifthis ever happens, do not let anyone whom thenational government has identified as amember of a passenger airbag risk group sit inthe right front passenger’s position (forexample, do not secure a rear-facing childrestraint in the right front passenger’s seat)until you have your vehicle serviced. SeeAirbag Off Switch on page 1-65 for more onthis, including important safety information.

You will be using a lap-shoulder belt to secure the childrestraint in this position. Be sure to follow theinstructions that came with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint when and as theinstructions say.

1-55

1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag.See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-65. If your childrestraint is forward-facing, move the seat asfar back as it will go before securing the restraint inthis seat. See “Seats” in the Index. If you needto use a rear-facing child restraint in this seat, makesure the airbag is off once the child restraint hasbeen installed.


3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.

1-56

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten thelap portion of the belt and feed the shoulderbelt back into the retractor. If you are using aforward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpfulto use your knee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.


To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way. The safetybelt will move freely again and be ready to work for anadult or larger child passenger.

If you had turned the airbag off with the switch,remember to be sure to use the airbag off switch to turnon the right front passenger’s airbag when you removethe child restraint from the vehicle unless the personwho will be sitting there is a member of the passengerairbag risk group. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-65.

{CAUTION:

If the right front passenger’s airbag is turnedoff for a person who is not in a risk groupidentified by the national government, thatperson will not have the extra protection of anairbag. In a crash, the airbag will not be able toinflate and help protect the person sittingthere. Do not turn off the passenger’s airbagunless the person sitting there is in a riskgroup. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-65 formore on this, including important safetyinformation.

1-57

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has airbags — one airbag for the driverand another airbag for the right front passenger.

Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk ofinjury from the force of an inflating airbag. But theseairbags must inflate very quickly to do their joband comply with federal regulations.

Here are the most important things to know about theairbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in a crashif you are not wearing your safety belt — evenif you have airbags. Wearing your safety beltduring a crash helps reduce your chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle or beingejected from it. Airbags are designed to workwith safety belts, but do not replace them.

CAUTION: (Continued)


Airbags are designed to deploy only inmoderate to severe frontal and near frontalcrashes. They are not designed to inflate inrollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, orin many side crashes. And, for someunrestrained occupants, airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes than moreforceful airbags have provided in the past.Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safetybelt properly — whether or not there is anairbag for that person.

1-58

{CAUTION:

Airbags inflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If you are too close to aninflating airbag, as you would be if you wereleaning forward, it could seriously injure you.Safety belts help keep you in position beforeand during a crash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with airbags. The driver should sitas far back as possible while still maintainingcontrol of the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very close to,any airbag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer the best protection for adults, butnot for young children and infants.



Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor itsairbag system is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protection that achild restraint system can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in your vehicle. Toread how, see Older Children on page 1-36 andInfants and Young Children on page 1-39.

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel, whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-29.

1-59

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel.

The right front passenger’s airbag is in the instrumentpanel on the passenger’s side.

1-60

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and anairbag, the bag might not inflate properly or itmight force the object into that person causingsevere injury or even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not putanything between an occupant and an airbag,and do not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbagsare designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflateonly if the impact exceeds a predetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholds take into accounta variety of desired deployment and non-deploymentevents and are used to predict how severe a crashis likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbagswill or should deploy is not based on how fast yourvehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact and how quickly yourvehicle slows down.

If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall thatdoes not move or deform, the threshold level isabout 9 to 17 mph (14 to 27 km/h).(The threshold levelcan vary, however, with specific vehicle design, sothat it can be somewhat above or below this range.)

1-61

Airbags may inflate at different crash speeds. Forexample:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbagcould inflate at a different crash speed than ifthe object were moving.

• If the object deforms, the airbag could inflate at adifferent crash speed than if the object does notdeform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) theairbag could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle theairbag could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straight into the object.

The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger) arenot intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts because inflationwould not likely help the occupants.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether anairbag should have inflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costswere. Inflation is determined by the angle of theimpact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontalor near-frontal impacts.

The airbag system is designed to work properly under awide range of conditions, including off-road usage.Observe safe driving speeds, especially on roughterrain. As always, wear your safety belt. See Off-RoadDriving on page 4-16 for more tips on off-road driving.

1-62

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensingsystem detects that the vehicle is in a crash. Thesensing system triggers a release of gas from theinflator, which inflates the airbag. The inflator, airbag,and related hardware are all part of the airbag modulesinside the steering wheel and in the instrument panelin front of the right front passenger.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel orthe instrument panel. Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the forceof the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually. But airbagswould not help you in many types of collisions,including rollovers, rear impacts and many side impacts,primarily because an occupant’s motion is not towardthose airbags. Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplement to safety belts, andthen only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions.

1-63

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quicklythat some people may not even realize the airbaginflated. Some components of the airbag module – thesteering wheel hub for the driver’s airbag, or theinstrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag –will be hot for a short time. The parts of the bagthat come into contact with you may be warm, but nottoo hot to touch. There will be some smoke anddust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags.Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeingor being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stoppeople from leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there is dust in theair. This dust could cause breathing problemsfor people with a history of asthma or otherbreathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone inthe vehicle should get out as soon as it is safeto do so. If you have breathing problems butcannot get out of the vehicle after an airbaginflates, then get fresh air by opening awindow or a door. If you experience breathingproblems following an airbag deployment, youshould seek medical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlockthe doors and turn the interior lamps on when theairbags inflate (if battery power is available). You canlock the doors again and turn the interior lamps offby using the door lock and interior lamp controls.

1-64

In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage may also occur from theright front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After theyinflate, you will need some new parts for yourairbag system. If you do not get them, the airbagsystem will not be there to help protect you inanother crash. A new system will include airbagmodules and possibly other parts. The servicemanual for your vehicle covers the need to replaceother parts.

• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records information aftera crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and EventData Recorders on page 7-9.

• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbagsystem. Improper service can mean that anairbag system will not work properly. See yourdealer for service.

Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’sor the right front passenger’s airbag, the airbagmay not work properly. You may have to replace theairbag module in the steering wheel or both theairbag module and the instrument panel for the rightfront passenger’s airbag. Do not open or breakthe airbag coverings.

Airbag Off SwitchYour vehicle has a switch on the instrument panel thatyou can use to turn off the right front passenger’sairbag.


1-65

This switch should only be turned to the off position ifthe person in the right front passenger’s position isa member of a passenger risk group identified by thenational government as follows:

Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) mustride in the front seat because:• my vehicle has no rear seat;

• my vehicle has a rear seat too small toaccommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or

• the infant has a medical condition which, accordingto the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for theinfant to ride in the front seat so that the drivercan constantly monitor the child’s condition.

Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 mustride in the front seat because:• my vehicle has no rear seat;

• although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rearseat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to 12sometimes must ride in the front because no spaceis available in the rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or

• the child has a medical condition which, accordingto the child’s physician, makes it necessary for thechild to ride in the front seat so that the drivercan constantly monitor the child’s condition.

Medical Condition. A passenger has amedical condition which, according to his orher physician:• causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk

for the passenger; and

• makes the potential harm from the passengerairbag in a crash greater than the potentialharm from turning off the airbag and allowing thepassenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboardor windshield in a crash.

{CAUTION:

If the right front passenger’s airbag is turned offfor a person who is not in a risk group identifiedby the national government, that person will nothave the extra protection of an airbag. In acrash, the airbag will not be able to inflate andhelp protect the person sitting there. Do not turnoff the passenger’s airbag unless the personsitting there is in a risk group.

1-66

To turn off the right front passenger’s airbag, insert yourignition key into the switch, push in, and move theswitch to the off position.

The airbag off light will come on to let you know that theright front passenger’s airbag is off. The airbag offlight will stay on to remind you that the airbag is off. Theright front passenger’s airbag will remain off until youturn it back on again.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light ever comes onwhen you have turned off the airbag, it meansthat something may be wrong with the airbagsystem. The right front passenger’s airbagcould inflate even though the switch is off. Ifthis ever happens, do not let anyone whom thenational government has identified as amember of a passenger airbag risk group sit inthe right front passenger’s position (forexample, do not secure a rear-facing childrestraint in the right front passenger’s seat)until you have your vehicle serviced.


1-67

To turn the right front passenger’s airbag on again,insert your ignition key into the switch, push in,and move the switch to the on position.

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.There are parts of the airbag system in several placesaround your vehicle. You do not want the system toinflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual have informationabout servicing your vehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 7-11.

{CAUTION:

For up to two minutes after the ignition key isturned off and the battery is disconnected, anairbag can still inflate during improper service.You can be injured if you are close to anairbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow wires,wires wrapped with yellow tape or yellowconnectors. They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to follow properservice procedures, and make sure the personperforming work for you is qualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.


1-68

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the front of thevehicle that could keep the airbags fromworking properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’sframe, bumper system, front end sheet metal orheight, they may keep the airbag system fromworking properly. Also, the airbag system may notwork properly if you relocate any of the airbagsensors. If you have any questions about this, youshould contact Customer Assistance before youmodify your vehicle. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Twoof the Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminder lightand all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractorsand anchorages are working properly. Look for any otherloose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you seeanything that might keep a safety belt system from doingits job, have it repaired.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a beltis torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, andhave them repaired or replaced. (The airbag systemdoes not need regular maintenance.)

1-69

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systems inyour vehicle. A damaged restraint system maynot properly protect the person using it,resulting in serious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure your restraintsystems are working properly after a crash,have them inspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if wornduring a more severe crash, then you need new parts.

If the LATCH system was being used during a moresevere crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collisiondamage also may mean you will need to have LATCHsystem, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the beltor LATCH system was not being used at the time ofthe collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag system earlierin this section.

1-70

Keys ...............................................................2-3Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-4Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-5

Doors and Locks .............................................2-8Door Locks ....................................................2-8Power Door Locks ..........................................2-9Delayed Locking .............................................2-9Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-10Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-10Lockout Protection ........................................2-11Liftgate (SUV) ..............................................2-11Midgate (SUT) ..............................................2-12Tailgate (SUT) ..............................................2-14

Windows ........................................................2-17Power Windows ............................................2-18Sun Visors ...................................................2-21

Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-21Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-21Passlock® ....................................................2-23

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-24New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-24Ignition Positions ..........................................2-24Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-25

Starting the Engine .......................................2-25Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-26Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-27Tow/Haul Mode ............................................2-30All-Wheel Drive ............................................2-31Parking Brake ..............................................2-35Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-36Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-37Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-37Engine Exhaust ............................................2-38Running the Engine While Parked ...................2-38

Mirrors ...........................................................2-40Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with

OnStar®, Compass and TemperatureDisplay ....................................................2-40

Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-42Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-43Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-44Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror with Curb

View Assist ..............................................2-44OnStar ® System .............................................2-45HomeLink ® Wireless Control System ...............2-47

HomeLink® Wireless Control SystemOperation .................................................2-48

Section 2 Features and Controls

2-1

Storage Areas ................................................2-51Glove Box ...................................................2-51Center Overhead Console ..............................2-51Center Console Storage Area .........................2-52Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-52Rear Seat Armrest ........................................2-56

Cargo Tie Downs (SUT) ................................2-56All-Weather Cargo Area (SUT) ........................2-56Tonneau Cover (SUT) ...................................2-58

Sunroof .........................................................2-59Vehicle Personalization ...................................2-61

Memory Seat ...............................................2-61

Section 2 Features and Controls

2-2

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignitionkey is dangerous for many reasons. Theycould operate the power windows or othercontrols or even make the vehicle move. Thechildren or others could be badly injured oreven killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehiclewith children.

2-3

Your vehicle has onedouble-sided key for theignition and all door locks.

If you ever lose your keys, your dealer will be able toassist you with obtaining replacements.

In an emergency contact roadside assistance. SeeRoadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.

If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle, you may beable to have your doors unlocked automatically with theOnStar® system if you have an active OnStar®

subscription. For more information see OnStar® Systemon page 2-45.

Remote Keyless Entry SystemYour keyless entry system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by other thanan authorized service facility could void authorization touse this equipment.

2-4

At times you may notice a decrease in range. This isnormal for any remote keyless entry system. If thetransmitter does not work or if you have to stand closerto your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far from yourvehicle. You may need to stand closer duringrainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects maybe blocking the signal. Take a few steps to theleft or right, hold the transmitter higher, andtry again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry System Operation onpage 2-5.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or aqualified technician for service.

Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperationYou can lock and unlock your doors from about 3 feet(1 m) up to 100 feet (30 m) away using the remotekeyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.

K (Unlock): Press thisbutton once to unlock thedriver’s door. Theinterior lamps will comeon. Pressing unlock againwithin three secondswill cause the remainingdoors to unlock.

You can choose different feedback options for eachpress of the unlock button. See “Lock Feedback” and“Unlock Feedback” under DIC Vehicle Customization onpage 3-54 for more information.

2-5

Q (Lock): Press this button once to lock all of thedoors. Pressing lock again within three secondsmay cause the horn to chirp for lock confirmation. Youcan choose different feedback options for each pressof the lock button. See “Lock Feedback” and “UnlockFeedback” under DIC Vehicle Customization onpage 3-54 for more information.

L (Panic): Press this button to sound the horn andflash the headlamps and taillamps for up to 30 seconds.Panic can be turned off by pressing the button again,by waiting for 30 seconds, or by starting the vehicle.

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach remote keyless entry transmitter is coded toprevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement canbe purchased through your dealer. Remember to bringany remaining transmitters with you when you go toyour dealer. When the dealer matches the replacementtransmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmittersmust also be matched. Once your dealer has coded thenew transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlockyour vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of fourtransmitters matched to it.

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your remote keylessentry transmitter should last about two years.

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will notwork at the normal range in any location. If you haveto get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,it is probably time to change the battery.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not totouch any of the circuitry. Static from your bodytransferred to these surfaces may damage thetransmitter.

2-6

To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter,do the following:

1. Insert a thin object, such as a coin, in the slotbetween the covers of the transmitter housingnear the key ring hole. Remove the bottomby twisting the coin.

2. Remove and replace the battery with athree-volt CR2032 or equivalent battery, positive (+)side up.

3. Align the covers and snap them together.4. Resynchronize the transmitter. See

“Resynchronization” following this information.5. Check the operation of the transmitter.

ResynchronizationResynchronization may be necessary due to thesecurity method used by this system. The transmitterdoes not send the same signal twice to the receiver. Thereceiver will not respond to a signal that has beensent previously. This prevents anyone from recordingand playing back the signal from the transmitter.

To resynchronize your transmitter, stand close to yourvehicle and press and hold the lock and unlockbuttons on the transmitter at the same time for15 seconds. The door locks should cycle to confirmsynchronization. If the locks do not cycle, see yourdealer for service.

2-7

Doors and LocksDoor Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers — especially children — can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door is locked, thehandle will not open it. You increase thechance of being thrown out of the vehiclein a crash if the doors are not locked. So,wear safety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.

• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out. A childcan be overcome by extreme heat and cansuffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Always lock your vehiclewhenever you leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow down orstop your vehicle. Locking your doors canhelp prevent this from happening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.

To unlock the door from the outside, use the keylessentry system or the key.

To unlock or lock the doorfrom the inside, slide themanual lever forwardor rearward.

2-8

Power Door Locks

The power door lockswitches are located onthe driver’s and frontpassenger’s armrests.

Q (Lock): Remove the ignition key and press the locksymbol to lock all of the doors.

If the delayed locking feature is on, the doors will notlock until five seconds after the last door is closed. Pressthe lock symbol twice to override this feature and lockall of the doors immediately. See Delayed Lockingon page 2-9 for more information.

K (Unlock): To unlock the doors, press the unlocksymbol.

Delayed LockingWhen locking the doors with the power lock switch orthe keyless entry transmitter and a door or the liftgate(if equipped) is open, the delayed locking featurewill delay locking the doors until five seconds after thelast door is closed. You will hear three chimes tosignal that the delayed locking feature is in use.

Pressing the power lock switch or the lock button on thekeyless entry transmitter twice will override the delayedlocking feature and immediately lock all the doors.

You can turn the delayed locking feature off or back onagain by doing the following:

1. Press and hold the power door lock switch in thelock position.

2. Press unlock twice on the remote keyless entrytransmitter.

This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.

You can also program this feature using the DIC.See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-54.

2-9

Programmable Automatic DoorLocksYour vehicle is equipped with an automatic lock/unlockfeature which enables you to program your vehicle’spower door locks. You can program this feature throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC VehicleCustomization on page 3-54 for more information on DICprogramming.

Rear Door Security LocksWith this feature, you can lock the rear doors so theycannot be opened from the inside.

This feature is located onthe inside edge of the reardoors.

To use the security locks, do the following:

1. Open one of the rear doors.2. Turn the lock

counterclockwise withyour ignition key.

3. Close the door.

4. Do the same to the other rear door.

If you want to open the rear door while the security lockis engaged, unlock and open the door from theoutside.

To disengage the child security lock feature, turn thelock clockwise with your ignition key.

2-10

Lockout ProtectionThis feature protects you from locking your key in thevehicle when the key is in the ignition and a dooris open.

If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is openand the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lockand then the driver’s door will unlock.

Liftgate (SUV)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgateopen because carbon monoxide (CO) gas cancome into your vehicle. You can not see orsmell CO. It can cause unconsciousness andeven death. If you must drive with the liftgateopen or if electrical wiring or other cable



connections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the liftgate:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling

system to its highest speed and select thecontrol setting that will force outside airinto your vehicle. See Dual AutomaticClimate Control System on page 3-20.

• If you have air outlets on or under theinstrument panel, open them all the way.See Engine Exhaust on page 2-38.

To unlock the liftgate, press the unlock button on any ofthe power door lock switches or the remote keylessentry transmitter.

Open the liftgate by pulling the handle located in thecenter of the door.

To lock the liftgate, press the lock button on any of thepower door lock switches or the remote keylessentry transmitter.

2-11

Midgate (SUT)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with the cargoarea covered and the tailgate and the midgateopen because carbon monoxide (CO) gas cancome into your vehicle. You can not see orsmell CO. It can cause unconsciousness andeven death. If you must drive with the cargocovers on and the tailgate and midgate openor if electrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the midgate:

• Make sure all windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling

system to its highest speed on the settingthat brings in outside air. This will forceoutside air into your vehicle. See DualAutomatic Climate Control System onpage 3-20.

• If you have air outlets on or under theinstrument panel, open them all the way.See Engine Exhaust on page 2-38.

The midgate allows you to extend the length of yourvehicle’s cargo area into the cab.

Lowering the MidgateThe midgate window must be completely lowered forthe midgate to be lowered. See “Midgate Window” underPower Windows on page 2-18.

Both the midgate and the midgate window can belowered while the ignition is in either RUN orACCESSORY, or while in Retained Accessory Power(RAP) mode. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) onpage 2-25 for more information.

To lower the midgate, do the following:

1. Fold the rear seats forward. See 60/40 Split BenchSeat on page 1-7. The front seats may have to bemoved forward slightly.

2. K (Midgate Window): Press the bottom part ofthis switch to lower the midgate window. SeeInstrument Panel Overview on page 3-4 for thelocation of this switch. The window can alsobe operated using the global express-down button.See “Global Glass Feature” under Power Windowson page 2-18.

2-12

3. Press either one of the two power midgate latchrelease buttons. The midgate will move slightlyforward from its closed position. The latch releasebuttons operate while the ignition is in RUN,ACCESSORY, in RAP mode, or up to ten minutesafter removing the key. If necessary, press theglobal express-down button to reactivate the releasebuttons for an additional ten minutes.

4. Pull the midgate inward and down to its fullylowered position.

5. Flip the auxiliary panel on the top of the midgateinto position to bridge the gap created by thehinges in the midgate. There are two finger holdson the panel.

Raising the MidgateTo raise the midgate, do the following:

1. Fold the auxiliary panel back into the exterior of themidgate. The panel should snap loudly back intoposition which means it is secure.

2. Reverse the steps for lowering the midgate listedpreviously. The midgate must be fully latched onboth sides before the window can be raised.

3. Press the top part of the midgate window switch toexpress-up the window. To stop the window, pressthe switch a second time.

2-13

Tailgate (SUT)To open the tailgate, do the following:

1. Press the button on the pin (B), which is attached tothe cable (A), to remove the pin from the latch boltnut (C).

2. Lift up on the latch on the left side of the vehicle torelease the spare tire carrier from the vehicle. Thehandle will stay in the raised position until thespare tire carrier is closed and latched properly.

2-14

{CAUTION:

If you drive with the spare tire carrierunlatched, you could injure pedestrians ordamage the vehicle. Make sure the carrier issecure before driving.

3. Swing the spare tire carrier to the side.

4. Open the tailgate by lifting the release handle whilepulling the tailgate toward you.

2-15

To close the tailgate, do the following:

1. Swing the tailgate up until it latches firmly intoplace.

{CAUTION:

The spare tire carrier must be secured so thatit does not strike and injure someone. Alwaysclose it into the latch forcefully. Make sure thatthe release handle is fully closed (down) andthat the cable is attached.

2. Move the spare tire carrier back into place until itlatches, by closing it into the latch forcefully. Thespare tire carrier is latched properly when the latchhandle has lowered to the closed position.

3. Reinstall the cable (A) by pushing in the button onthe pin (B) and inserting the pin into the latch boltnut (C).

4. Pull on the spare tire carrier to make sure it is firmlylatched.

2-16

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in avehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by the extreme heatand suffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave a child, ahelpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windows closed in warm orhot weather.

2-17

Power Windows

A power window switch is located on the armrest ofeach side door. The switches operate while the ignitionis in RUN or ACCESSORY or while RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) on page 2-25.

The driver’s door also has a switch for each of thepassenger’s windows.

Press the front of the switch to the first position to lowerthe window to the desired level. Pull up the front ofthe switch to raise the window.

Express-Down WindowsThe driver’s and front passenger’s window switcheshave an express-down feature which allows the windowto be lowered fully without continuously pressing theswitch. Press the front of the window switch down all theway and release. Express-down can be interrupted atany time by pulling up the front of the switch.

Window LockoutThis feature prevents passengers from operating theirwindows.

o (Window Lockout): This button is located near thepower window switches on the driver’s door. A lightin the lockout button will come on to show that lockouthas been activated. Press the button again to returnto normal operation.

2-18

Global Window Feature

The global window up andexpress-down buttons arelocated on the driver’s door.

This feature allows all side windows and midgatewindow, if equipped, to be opened or closed at thesame time.

q (Window Express-Down): Press the express-downbutton to lower all side windows and midgate window,if equipped, without stopping. Express-down will operatewhile the ignition is in RUN or ACCESSORY, or whileRetained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-25.

If the key is out of the ignition, express-down will onlyactivate while the driver’s door is open and the contenttheft-deterrent system is disabled. To stop theexpress-down, press the up button.

Pressing the global express-down button also activatesthe power midgate latch release buttons, if equipped.See “Lowering the Midgate” under Midgate (SUT)on page 2-12.

n (Window Up): Press the up button to raise allwindows. The midgate window, if equipped, willexpress-up while the side windows will go up a smallamount at a time. Press and hold the up button to raisethe four side windows all the way. The up buttonoperates while the ignition is in RUN or ACCESSORY,or while RAP is active.

Midgate WindowIf your vehicle has a midgate, the switch to operate thewindow is located on the instrument panel to the leftof the steering wheel. See Instrument Panel Overviewon page 3-4.

K (Midgate Window): Press the bottom of the switchto express-down the window. Press the top of theswitch to express-up the window. Press the top orbottom of the switch a second time to stop the window.

2-19

The window switch will operate while the ignition is inRUN or ACCESSORY, or while Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 2-25.

The window can also be operated using the globalwindow buttons. See “Global Window Feature”previously.

{CAUTION:

If express override is activated, the midgatewindow will not reverse automatically. You orothers could be injured and the window couldbe damaged. Before you use express override,make sure that all people and obstructions areclear of the midgate window path.

Midgate Window Express Override ModeIf an obstruction or weather condition such as severeicing stops the window as it is moving upward, thewindow will automatically reverse to a partially openposition. The window will return to normal operationonce the obstruction or condition is removed.

The window auto-reversal function can be overriden inthe express override mode. To override, the windowmust be operated manually by pressing and holding themidgate window switch or the global window button.This must be done within two seconds after the midgatewindow has stopped at a partially open position. Theexpress override mode only works immediately followinga window auto-reversal. Window express functionswill not work while in this mode.

Midgate Window Error/Jog ModeIf the midgate window has sensed conditions which maylead to damage or malfunction of the window system,the window will automatically go into Error/Jog mode. Inthis mode, window express functions will not work.The window can only be operated manually by pressingthe midgate window switch or the global windowbutton. The window will move slightly and stop. Pressand hold the window switch or global window buttonto continue to close the window a small amountat a time.

2-20

To Exit Error/Jog Mode

1. Ensure normal midgate window operating conditionshave begun.

2. Press and hold the midgate window down switchapproximately one second to start windowexpress-down.

3. Release the window down switch and allow thewindow to fully open.Do not use any window switches once windowmovement has started.

4. Press the midgate window up switch and visuallyconfirm that the express-up has been completed.

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, you can swing down the visors. Youcan also swing them out to help block glare at thefront and side windows.

Illuminated Visor Vanity MirrorsPull the sunvisor down and lift the mirror cover to turnon the lamps.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrentfeatures, we know that nothing we put on it can make itimpossible to steal.

Content Theft-DeterrentYour vehicle is equipped with a content theft-deterrentalarm system.

With this system, thesecurity light in theinstrument panel clusterwill flash as you openthe door if your ignitionis off.

2-21

This light reminds you to activate the theft-deterrentsystem. Here is how to do it:

1. Open the door.

2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch orthe remote keyless entry transmitter. The securitylight will illuminate to inform the driver the system isarming. If a door is open when the doors arelocked, the security light will flash.

3. Close all doors. The security light should go offafter about 30 seconds. The alarm is not armeduntil the security light goes off.If the delayed locking feature is turned on, thetheft-deterrent system will not start the armingprocess until the last door is closed and the delaytimer has expired. See Delayed Locking onpage 2-9.

If a locked door is opened without the key or the remotekeyless entry transmitter, the alarm will go off. Theheadlamps and parking lamps will flash for two minutes,and the horn will sound for 30 seconds, then will turnoff to save the battery power. You can choose differentfeedback options for the alarm. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 3-43.

Remember, the theft-deterrent system will not activate ifyou lock the doors with the vehicle’s key or use themanual door lock. It activates only if you use a powerdoor lock switch with the door open, or with the remotekeyless entry transmitter. You should also rememberthat you can start your vehicle with the correct ignitionkey if the alarm has been set off.

Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:

• If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrentsystem, the vehicle should be locked with thedoor key after the doors are closed.

• Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remotekeyless entry transmitter. Unlocking a door anyother way will set off the alarm.

If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door withthe key. You can also turn off the alarm by pressingunlock on the remote keyless entry transmitter. The alarmwill not stop if you try to unlock a door any other way.

2-22

Testing the AlarmThe alarm can be tested by following these steps:

1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s windowand open the driver’s door.

2. Activate the system by locking the doors with thepower door lock switch while the door is open, orwith the remote keyless entry transmitter.

3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait forthe security light to go out.

4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the doorwith the manual door lock and open the door. Thisshould set off the alarm.

While the alarm is set, the power door unlock switch isnot operational.

If the alarm does not sound when it should but theheadlamps flash, check to see if the horn works. Thehorn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse, seeInstrument Panel Fuse Block on page 5-101 andUnderhood Fuse Block on page 5-105.

If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do notflash, the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer.

Passlock ®

Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock®

theft-deterrent system.Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock®

enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned witha valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignitionlock cylinder is tampered with, the fuel system isdisabled and the vehicle will not start.During normal operation, the security light will turn offapproximately five seconds after the key is turnedto RUN.

If the engine stalls and the security light flashes, waitabout 10 minutes until the light stops flashing beforetrying to restart the engine. Remember to releasethe key from START as soon as the engine starts.

If the engine does not start after three tries, the vehicleneeds service.If the engine is running and the security light comes on,you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the engineoff. However, your Passlock® system is not workingproperly and must be serviced by your dealer. Yourvehicle is not protected by Passlock® at this time. Youmay also want to check the fuse. See Instrument PanelFuse Block on page 5-101 and Underhood Fuse Block onpage 5-105. See your dealer for service.

In an emergency, call the Roadside Assistance Center.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.

2-23

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: Your vehicle does not need an elaboratebreak-in. But it will perform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less forthe first 500 miles (805 km).

• Do not drive at any one speed, fast or slow, forthe first 500 miles (805 km). Do not makefull-throttle starts.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles(322 km) or so. During this time your newbrake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stopswith new linings can mean premature wearand earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you get new brakelinings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towinga Trailer on page 4-68 for more information.

Ignition Positions

Use the key to turn the ignition switch to four differentpositions.

A (Lock): This position locks the ignition andtransmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will onlybe able to remove the key when the ignition is turnedto LOCK.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from theignition switch could cause damage or break thekey. Use the correct key and turn the key only withyour hand. Make sure the key is all the way in.

2-24

If it is, turn the steering wheel left and right whileyou turn the key hard. If none of this works,then your vehicle needs service.

B (Accessory): This position lets you use things like theradio and the windshield wipers when the engine is off.

Notice: Lengthy operation of features such as theradio in the accessory ignition position may drain thebattery and prevent your vehicle from starting. Do notoperate your vehicle in the accessory ignitionposition for a long period of time.

C (Run): This is the position for driving.

D (Start): This position starts the engine.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)The Retained Accessory Power (RAP) feature will allowcertain features on your vehicle to continue to workfor up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned toLOCK or until one of the doors is opened.

Starting the EngineYour vehicle is equipped with Starter Motor Control. Thisfeature assists in starting the engine and protects theelectrical system. This feature may cause the engine tocrank even after the ignition key is not in START.

Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).Your engine will not start in any other position — that isa safety feature. To restart when you are alreadymoving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if yourvehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when yourvehicle is stopped.

1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn theignition key to START. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speed will go down asyour engine gets warm.

Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than15 seconds at a time will disengage the startermotor, cause your battery to be drained muchsooner, and add excessive heat that can damageyour starter motor. Try not to hold the key in STARTfor longer than 15 seconds and wait about15 seconds between each try to help avoid drainingyour battery or damaging your starter.

2. If it does not start within 10 seconds, push theaccelerator pedal all the way to the floor, whileyou hold the ignition key in START. Whenthe engine starts, let go of the key and let up on theaccelerator pedal. Wait about 15 seconds betweeneach try.

2-25

When starting your engine in very cold weather (below0°F or −18°C), do this:

1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn theignition key to START and hold it there up to15 seconds. When the engine starts, let go ofthe key.

2. If your engine still will not start, or starts but thenstops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to thefloor and holding it there as you hold the key inSTART for about three seconds. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and accelerator. If thevehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do thesame thing, but this time keep the pedal downfor five or six seconds. This clears the extragasoline from the engine.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work with theelectronics in your vehicle. If you add electricalparts or accessories, you could change the way theengine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,check with your dealer. If you do not, your enginemight not perform properly.

Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may be equipped with an engine coolantheater.

In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the enginecoolant heater can help. You will get easier startingand better fuel economy during engine warm-up.

Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in aminimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. Attemperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolantheater is not required. Your vehicle may also have aninternal thermostat in the plug end of the cord. This willprevent operation of the engine coolant heater whenthe temperature is at or above 0°F (-18°C) as noted onthe cord.

2-26

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Locate the electrical cord near the front recoveryloop on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outletcould cause an electrical shock. Also, thewrong kind of extension cord could overheatand cause a fire. You could be seriouslyinjured. Plug the cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord willnot reach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug andstore the cord as it was before to keep it awayfrom moving engine parts. If you do not, it could bedamaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heater pluggedin? The answer depends on the outside temperature, thekind of oil you have, and some other things. Insteadof trying to list everything here, we ask that you contactyour dealer in the area where you will be parkingyour vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advicefor that particular area.

Automatic Transmission Operation

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmissionand features an electronic shift position indicatorlocated within the instrument panel cluster.

There are several different positions for your shift lever.

2-27

PARK (P): This position locks your drive wheels. It isthe best position to use when you start your enginebecause your vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if theshift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engine isrunning unless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured. Tobe sure your vehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground, always set yourparking brake and move the shift lever toPARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 2-36. If you are pulling a trailer, seeTowing a Trailer on page 4-68.

{CAUTION:

Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL cancause your vehicle to roll even if thetransmission is in PARK (P). You or someoneelse could be seriously injured. Be sure to setthe parking brake before placing the transfercase in NEUTRAL. See Parking Brake onpage 2-35.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicleis moving forward could damage the transmission.The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,ice or sand without damaging your transmission,see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snowon page 4-52.

2-28

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does notconnect with the drive wheels. To restart when youare already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while your engine isrunning at high speed is dangerous. Unlessyour foot is firmly on the brake pedal, yourvehicle could move very rapidly. You couldlose control and hit people or objects. Do notshift into a drive gear while your engine isrunning at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)with the engine running at high speed may damagethe transmission. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is notrunning at high speed when shifting your vehicle.

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If youneed more power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push youraccelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push theaccelerator all the way down.

You will shift down to the next gear and have morepower.

DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying aheavy load, driving on steep hills or for off-roaddriving. You may want to shift the transmission toTHIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if thetransmission shifts too often.

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,however it offers more power and lower fuel economythan DRIVE (D).

2-29

SECOND (2): This position gives you more power butlower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) onhills. It can help control your speed as you go downsteep mountain roads, but then you would also want touse your brakes off and on.

If you manually select SECOND (2), the transmissionwill drive in second gear. You may use this featurefor reducing the speed of the rear wheels when you aretrying to start your vehicle from a stop on slipperyroad surfaces. Once the vehicle is moving, shift intoDRIVE (D).

FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power,but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can useit on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If theshift lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is movingforward, the transmission will not shift into first gearuntil the vehicle is going slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle inone place on a hill using only the acceleratorpedal may damage the transmission. If you arestuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.

On cold days, approximately 32°F (0°C) or colder, yourtransmission is designed to shift differently until theengine reaches normal operating temperature. This isintended to improve heater performance.

Tow/Haul Mode

Your vehicle is equippedwith a tow/haul mode. Thebutton is located on theinstrument panel tothe right of the steeringwheel.

You can use this feature to assist when towing orhauling a heavy load. See “Tow/Haul Mode” underTowing a Trailer on page 4-68 for more information.

2-30

All-Wheel DriveAll-wheel drive sends your engine’s driving power to allfour wheels for extra traction. To get the most out ofall-wheel drive, you must be familiar with its operation.

Notice: Driving on pavement in Four-WheelHigh Lock or Four Wheel Low Lock for extendedperiods may cause premature wear on your vehicle’spowertrain and tires. Do not drive in Four-WheelHigh Lock or Four-Wheel Low Lock on pavement forextended periods.

Transfer Case Buttons

The transfer case buttonsare located to the right ofthe instrument panelcluster. Use these switchesto shift into and out ofthe different all-wheel drivemodes.

You can choose between four modes:

4 m (Four-Wheel High): This setting is used fordriving in most street and highway situations. You canalso use this setting for light or variable off-roadconditions.

4 mQ (Four-Wheel High Lock): Use this modewhen you need extra traction in most off-road situationssuch as sand, mud, snow, or level, rocky trails.

4LO nQ (Four-Wheel Low Lock): This modedelivers extra torque to all four wheels and is used forextreme off-road conditions. You might choosefour-wheel low Lock if you are driving off-road in deepsand, mud, or snow and climbing or descendingsteep hills.

When in this mode you can also choose to lock the rearaxle for additional traction in extreme off-road situations.See Locking Rear Axle on page 4-10.

Notice: Operating your vehicle in Four-WheelLow Lock above 50 mph (80 km/h) for any extendedperiod of time could cause damage to the transfercase. Do not operate your vehicle in Four-WheelLow Lock above 50 mph (80 km/h) for extendedperiods.

2-31

{CAUTION:

Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL cancause your vehicle to roll even if thetransmission is in PARK (P). You or someoneelse could be seriously injured. Be sure to setthe parking brake before placing the transfercase in NEUTRAL. See Parking Brake onpage 2-35.

N (NEUTRAL): Shift the vehicle’s transfer case toNEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. SeeRecreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-64 or TowingYour Vehicle on page 4-64 for more information.

Indicator lights in the buttons show which mode you arein. The indicator lights will come on briefly when youturn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the lights donot come on, you should take your vehicle to yourdealer for service. An indicator light will flash whileshifting the transfer case. It will remain on when the shiftis complete. If for some reason the transfer casecannot make a requested shift, it will return to the lastchosen setting.

If the SERVICE 4WD message stays on, you shouldtake your vehicle to your dealer for service. See “Service4WD message” under Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 3-43.

Shifting between Four-Wheel High andFour-Wheel High LockWith the vehicle traveling less than 40 mph (64 km/h),press and release the Four-Wheel High or Four-WheelLow Lock button. The indicator light will flash whileshifting. It will remain on when the shift is complete.

It may be necessary to drive backwards for a shortdistance of 25 feet (7.5 m) to get the lock feature todisengage.

2-32

Shifting into Four-Wheel Low LockTo shift into Four-Wheel Low Lock, the ignition must be inRUN and the vehicle must be stopped or moving lessthan 3 mph (5 km/h) with the transmission inNEUTRAL (N). The preferred method for shifting intoFour-Wheel Low is to have your vehicle moving1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release theFour-Wheel Low Lock button. You must wait for theFour-Wheel Low Lock indicator light to stop flashing andremain lit before shifting your transmission in gear.

Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear beforethe indicator light stops flashing could causedamage to the transfer case. Always wait until theindicator light stops flashing before putting thetransmission back in gear.

It is normal for your vehicle to have engagement noiseand bump when shifting between Four-Wheel Lowand Four-Wheel High or Four-Wheel High Lock rangesor from NEUTRAL with the engine running.

If the Four-Wheel Low Lock button is pressed whenyour vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the Four-WheelLow Lock indicator light will flash for 15 seconds and notcomplete the shift unless your vehicle is moving lessthan 3 mph (5 km/h) and the transmission is inNEUTRAL (N). After 15 seconds the transfer case willreturn to the setting last chosen.

Shifting Out of Four-Wheel Low LockTo shift from Four-Wheel Low Lock to Four-Wheel Highor Four-Wheel High Lock, your vehicle must bestopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with thetransmission in NEUTRAL (N) and the ignition in RUN.The preferred method for shifting out of Four-WheelLow Lock is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the Four-WheelHigh or Four-Wheel High Lock button. You must wait forthe Four-Wheel High or Four-Wheel High Lockindicator light to stop flashing and remain lit beforeshifting your transmission into gear.

It is normal for your vehicle to have engagement noiseand bump when shifting between Four-Wheel Lowand Four-Wheel High or Four-Wheel High Lock rangesor from NEUTRAL with the engine running.

If the Four-Wheel High or Four-Wheel High Lock buttonis pressed when your vehicle is in gear and/or moving,the Four-Wheel High or Four-Wheel High Lock indicatorlight will flash for 15 seconds but will not completethe shift unless your vehicle is moving less than 3 mph(5 km/h) and the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N).


2-33

Shifting into NEUTRALTo shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL, do the following:

1. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it willnot roll.

2. Set the parking brake.

3. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to RUN.

4. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).

5. Shift the transfer case to Four-Wheel High.

6. Simultaneously press and hold the Four-WheelHigh and Four-Wheel Low buttons for 10 seconds.The NEUTRAL light will come on when thetransfer case shift to NEUTRAL is complete.

7. If the engine is running, verify that the transfer caseis in NEUTRAL by shifting the transmission toREVERSE (R), then shift the transmission toDRIVE (D) and then back to neutral.

8. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY, which will turnthe engine off.

9. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P).

10. Turn the ignition to LOCK.

Shifting Out of NEUTRALTo shift the transfer case out of NEUTRAL, do thefollowing:

1. Set the parking brake and apply the regularbrake pedal.

2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) and turn theignition to RUN with the engine off.

3. Press the button for the desired transfer case shiftposition (Four-Wheel High, Four-Wheel High Lock,or Four-Wheel Low Lock).

4. After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRALthe red light will go out.

5. You may start the engine and shift the transmissionto the desired position.


2-34

Parking BrakeTo set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedaldown with your right foot. Push down the parkingbrake pedal with your left foot.

A chime will activate and the warning light will flashwhen the parking brake is applied and the vehicleis moving at least 3 mph (5 km/h) for at leastthree seconds.

To release the parking brake, hold the regular brakepedal down. Pull the bottom edge of the lever, locatedabove the parking brake pedal, with the parkingbrake symbol, to release the parking brake.

If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,the brake system warning light will go off.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and cause prematurewear or damage to brake system parts. Verify thatthe parking brake is fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,see Towing a Trailer on page 4-68.

2-35

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) withthe parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. If you have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehicle willnot move, even when you are on fairly levelground, use the steps that follow. If you arepulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 4-68.

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot andset the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressing andholding the button on the end of the shift lever andmoving the lever forward as far as it will go.

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you canleave your vehicle with the ignition key in yourhand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

Leaving Your Vehicle With the EngineRunning

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle withthe engine running. Your vehicle could movesuddenly if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.And, if you leave the vehicle with the enginerunning, it could overheat and even catch fire.You or others could be injured. Do not leaveyour vehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and theparking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After youmove the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regularbrake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shiftlever away from PARK (P) without first pulling ittoward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever wasnot fully locked into PARK (P).

2-36

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shift yourvehicle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehiclemay put too much force on the parking pawl in thetransmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shiftlever out of PARK (P). This is called torque lock.To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and thenshift into PARK (P) properly before you leave thedriver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)on page 2-36.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out ofPARK (P) before you release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to have anothervehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of thepressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, soyou can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lockcontrol system. You have to fully apply the regularbrakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when theignition is in RUN. See Automatic TransmissionOperation on page 2-27.

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaustparts under your vehicle and ignite. Do notpark over papers, leaves, dry grass or otherthings that can burn.

2-37

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gascarbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see orsmell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• Your exhaust system sounds strange or

different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.• Your vehicle was damaged when driving

over high points on the road or over roaddebris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been

modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into yourvehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windows down toblow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But if youever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaust intoyour vehicle. See the earlier caution underEngine Exhaust on page 2-38.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even ifthe climate control fan is at the highest setting.One place this can happen is a garage.Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.NEVER park in a garage with the enginerunning.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. SeeWinter Driving on page 4-48.

2-38

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) withthe parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured. Tobe sure your vehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground, always set yourparking brake and move the shift lever toPARK (P).

{CAUTION:

All-wheel drive vehicles with the transfer casein NEUTRAL will allow the vehicle to roll, evenif your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be surethe transfer case is in a drive gear — not inNEUTRAL. Always set your parking brake.

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will notmove. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-36.

If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 4-68.

2-39

Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar ®, Compass andTemperature DisplayYou may have OnStar® as a feature on this mirror. Forinformation on the OnStar® system see OnStar®

System on page 2-45 or consult the OnStar® manual.

The automatic dimming mirror dims to the proper level tominimize glare from lights behind you after dark.

The mirror includes a compass reading and outsidetemperature display in the upper right corner ofthe mirror. The dual display can be turned on or off bypressing either the TEMP or the COMP button.

Temperature DisplayThe temperature can be displayed by pressing theTEMP button. Press the TEMP button once briefly totoggle the temperature reading on and off. To alternatethe temperature reading between Fahrenheit andCelsius, press and hold the TEMP button forapproximately four seconds until the display blinks Fand C. Press and release the TEMP button to togglebetween the Fahrenheit and Celsius readings. Afterabout four seconds of inactivity, the display willstop blinking and display the last selection made.

If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for anextended period of time (30 minutes), see yourdealer. Under certain circumstances, a delay in updatingthe temperature is normal.

Automatic Dimming Mirror OperationPress and hold the TEMP button for about eight secondsto turn the automatic dimming feature on or off. Theindicator light to the right of the TEMP button will turn onor off to show when the automatic dimming feature isactivated. Once the mirror is turned off, it will remain offuntil it is turned back on, or until the vehicle isrestarted.

2-40

Compass OperationPress the COMP button briefly to turn the compass onor off.

When the ignition and the compass feature are on, thecompass will show two character boxes for abouttwo seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will displaythe compass heading.

Compass CalibrationThe compass may need calibration if one of thefollowing occurs:

• If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle.

• After about five seconds, the display does not showa compass heading (N for North, for example),there may be a strong magnetic field interfering withthe compass. Such interference may be causedby a magnetic antenna mount, a magnetic note padholder, or a similar magnetic item.

• The compass does not display the correct headingand the compass zone variance is set correctly.

In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in themirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, pushthe COMP button for about eight seconds or untilCAL is displayed.

The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle incircles at five mph (8 km/h) or less until a direction isdisplayed.

Compass VarianceCompass variance is the difference between earth’smagnetic north and true geographic north. If notadjusted to account for compass variance, the compasscould give false readings.

The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.It will be necessary to adjust the compass tocompensate for compass variance if the vehicle isoutside zone eight. Under certain circumstances, asduring a long distance cross-country trip, it will benecessary to adjust for compass variance.

2-41

To adjust for compass variance, do the following:

1. Find your current location and variance zonenumber on the zone map.

2. Press and hold the COMP button for five secondsuntil a zone number appears in the display.

3. Press the COMP button on the bottom of the mirroruntil the new zone number appears in the display.After you stop pressing the button, the displaywill show a compass direction within a few seconds.

Cleaning the MirrorUse a paper towel or similar material dampened withglass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on themirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enterthe mirror.

Outside Power Mirrors

The controls are locatedon the driver’s doorarmrest.

Move the upper selector switch to the left or right tochoose the mirror to be adjusted, then press the dots,located below the selector switch on the four-way controlpad, to adjust the direction of each mirror.

The mirrors may also include a memory function whichworks in conjunction with the memory seats. SeeMemory Seat on page 2-61 for more information.

2-42

Power Folding MirrorsTo fold or unfold the mirrors, move the selector switch,located above the mirror control, to the middleposition. The mirror control will illuminate. Press theright or left side of the mirror control to fold or unfold themirrors. The mirror will adjust as it folds in and willreposition itself once it is unfolded.

If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfolded manually,they may shake or flutter at normal driving speedsand may not stay in the unfolded position. If thishappens, the mirrors need to be reset. See “Resettingthe Power Folding Mirrors” next.

Resetting the Power Folding MirrorsThe power folding mirrors will need to be reset if:

• They are accidently manually folded/unfolded.

• The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position.

• The mirrors shake and flutter at normal drivingspeeds.

To reset the power folding mirrors, fold and unfold themat least three times using the mirror controls. This willreset them to their normal detent position.

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (like othervehicles) look farther away than they really are.If you cut too sharply into the right lane, youcould hit a vehicle on your right. Check yourinside mirror or glance over your shoulderbefore changing lanes.

The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from thedriver’s seat. It makes things in the mirror appearfarther away than they really are.

2-43

Outside Heated Mirrors

If the vehicle has heatedmirrors, the button to turnthis function on or offis located on the climatecontrol panel.

Press this button to warm the driver’s and passenger’soutside rearview mirrors to help clear them of ice,snow, and condensation.

With a rear window defogger, the heated mirrors willcome on when this button is pressed. See “RearWindow Defogger” under Dual Automatic ClimateControl System on page 3-20 for more information.

Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrorwith Curb View AssistIf the vehicle has this feature, the driver’s outside mirroradjusts for the glare of the headlamps behind you.See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar®,Compass and Temperature Display on page 2-40.

The vehicle’s outside mirrors can also perform a curbview assist mirror function. This causes the passenger’sand/or driver’s mirror to tilt to a preselected positionwhen the vehicle is in REVERSE (R). This feature maybe useful in viewing the curb when parallel parking.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R) and ashort delay has occurred, the passenger’s and/ordriver’s mirror will return to its original position.

To change the preselected tilt position, adjust themirrors to the desired position while the vehicle is inREVERSE (R). When the vehicle is shifted out ofREVERSE (R), this new position is saved in memory asthe tilt position.

This feature can be enabled/disabled through the DriverInformation Center. See Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 3-43 for more information.

2-44

OnStar ® SystemOnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellitetechnology, wireless communications, and call centersto provide you with a wide range of safety, security,information, and convenience services.

A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms andconditions of the OnStar® Subscription ServiceAgreement are included in the vehicle’s glove boxliterature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com orwww.onstarcanada.com. Contact OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827), or press theOnStar® button to speak to an OnStar® advisor 24 hoursa day, 7 days a week.

Terms and conditions of the Subscription ServiceAgreement can be found at www.onstar.com orwww.onstarcanada.com.

OnStar ® ServicesFor new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe andSound Plan is included for the first year. You canextend this plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to theDirections and Connections Plan to meet your needs.For more information, press the OnStar® button to speakwith an advisor.

Safe and Sound Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Tracking

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• Remote Diagnostics

• Online Concierge

Directions and Connections Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

2-45

OnStar ® Personal CallingAs an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Callingcapability is an available hands-free wireless phone thatis integrated into the vehicle. Calls can be placednationwide using simple voice commands with noadditional contracts and no additional roaming charges.To find out more about OnStar® Personal Calling,refer to the OnStar® user’s guide in the vehicle’s glovebox, visit www.onstar.com or www.onstarcanada.com;or speak to an OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar®

button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

OnStar ® Virtual AdvisorVirtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar® Personal Callingthat uses minutes to access up-to-date weather andtraffic reports for your area, news and sports updates,stock quotes, entertainment, and more. Customizeyour information profile at www.myonstar.com. See theOnStar® user’s guide for more information.

OnStar ® Steering Wheel ControlsA steering wheel control can be used to interact with theOnStar® personal calling feature.

Press the control with thissymbol on the steeringwheel to make a phonecall.

When calling into voice mail systems, or to dial directorynumbers, press the control, say the number(s), thensay “dial.”

See the OnStar® user’s guide for more information.

2-46

HomeLink ® Wireless ControlSystem

HomeLink®, a combined universal transmitter andreceiver, provides a way to replace up to threehand-held transmitters used to activate devices such asgate operators, garage door openers, entry doorlocks, security systems, and home lighting. AdditionalHomeLink® information can be found on the internet atwww.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)this device may not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

Changes and modifications to this system by other thanan authorized service facility could void authorizationto use this equipment.

2-47

HomeLink ® Wireless ControlSystem OperationDo not use the HomeLink® Transmitter with any garagedoor opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”feature. This includes any garage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newergarage door opener with rolling codes, please besure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete theprogramming of your HomeLink® Transmitter.

Read the instructions completely before attempting toprogram the HomeLink® Transmitter. Because of thesteps involved, it may be helpful to have another personavailable to assist you in programming the transmitter.

Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles aswell as for future HomeLink® programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the sale of the vehicle, theprogrammed HomeLink® buttons should be erased forsecurity purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink® Buttons”or, for assistance, contact HomeLink® on the Internet at:www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garagedoor or gate operator you are programming. Whenprogramming a garage door, it is advised to park outsideof the garage.

It is recommended that a new battery be installed inyour hand-held transmitter for quicker and moreaccurate transmission of the radio frequency.

Programming HomeLink ®

Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off whileprogramming the transmitter. Follow these steps toprogram up to three channels:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,releasing only when the indicator light begins toflash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down thebuttons for longer than 30 seconds and do notrepeat this step to program a second and/or thirdtransmitter to the remaining two HomeLink® buttons.

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®

buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desiredbutton on HomeLink® and the hand-held transmitterbutton. Do not release the buttons until Step 4has been completed.

2-48

Some entry gates and garage door openers mayrequire you to substitute Step 3 with the procedurenoted in “Gate Operator and CanadianProgramming” later in this section.

4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly after HomeLink® successfully receives thefrequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.Release both buttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink® buttonand observe the indicator light.If the indicator light stays on constantly,programming is complete and your device shouldactivate when the HomeLink® button is pressed andreleased.To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,begin with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink®.”Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of theprogrammed channels.If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two secondsand then turns to a constant light, continue withSteps 6 through 8 following to complete theprogramming of a rolling-code equipped device(most commonly, a garage door opener).

6. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. This can usually be found wherethe hanging antenna wire is attached to themotor-head unit.

7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”button. The name and color of the button mayvary by manufacturer.You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.

8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold theprogrammed HomeLink® button for two seconds,then release. Repeat the press/hold/releasesequence a second time, and depending on thebrand of the garage door opener (or other rollingcode device), repeat this sequence a third timeto complete the programming.HomeLink® should now activate your rolling-codeequipped device.

To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink®.” You donot want to repeat Step 1, as this will erase allprevious programming.

2-49

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to “time out” or quit after several seconds oftransmission. This may not be long enough forHomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to“time out” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator by using the“Programming HomeLink®” procedures (regardless ofwhere you live), replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingHomeLink®” with the following:

Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button whileyou press and release every two seconds (cycle)your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal hasbeen successfully accepted by HomeLink®. Theindicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming HomeLink®”to complete.

Using HomeLink ®

Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink® button for atleast half of a second. The indicator light will comeon while the signal is being transmitted.

Erasing HomeLink ® ButtonsTo erase programming from the three buttons do thefollowing:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons untilthe indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.Do not hold the two outside buttons for longerthan 30 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

HomeLink® is now in the train (learning) mode and canbe programmed at any time beginning with Step 2under “Programming HomeLink®” shown earlier in thissection.

Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can bereprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a SingleHomeLink® Button” following this section.

2-50

Reprogramming a Single HomeLink ®

ButtonTo program a device to HomeLink® using a HomeLink®

button previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. Donot release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink®

button, proceed with Step 2 under “ProgrammingHomeLink®” shown earlier in this section.

Resetting DefaultsTo reset HomeLink® to default settings do the following:

1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.

2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink®

indicator light turns off.

3. Release both buttons.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at1-800-355-3515, or on the Internet atwww.homelink.com.

Storage Areas

Glove BoxOpen the glove box by pulling the bottom of the handleupward.

Center Overhead Console

Your vehicle is equipped with either a short or longoverhead console.

2-51

To open a door on the console, push on the rear edgeof the door and let it swing open. Push the door upuntil it latches to close the door.

The overhead consoles also includes reading lamps, theHomeLink transmitter buttons and the sunroof switch(if equipped).

Center Console Storage AreaYour vehicle has a console compartment between thebucket seats.

To open it, press the button on the side of the consoleand swing the console lid open.

Luggage CarrierIf your vehicle has this feature, you can load cargo onyour vehicle.

The luggage carrier consists of siderails attached to theroof. The crossrails attach into the siderails and canbe moved back and forth (fore and aft) to accommodatesecuring various cargo sizes.

Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier thatweighs more than 300 lbs. (136 kg) or hangs over therear or sides of the vehicle may damage your vehicle.Load cargo only on top of the crossrails and tie thecargo down to the crossrail support cargo tie-downloops, making sure to fasten it securely.

Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity whenloading your vehicle. For more information on vehiclecapacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle onpage 4-58.

2-52

Adjusting the CrossrailsAdjust the crossrails to fit your load by doing thefollowing:

1. Loosen the lock knobs on the crossrail supports byturning the knobs counterclockwise. Only loosenthem enough to allow the crossrails to slide easily.

2. Slide the crossrails to the desired position, beingsure to align the lines in the side rails with thearrows on the crossrail supports.

3. Tighten the lock knobs and then try to move thecrossrails back and forth to be sure that they donot move.

4. Once you load the cargo onto the crossrails, secureit by tying it down to the crossrail support cargotie-down loops. Do not load cargo directly onthe roof of your vehicle.Be sure you do not cover the roof marker lamps orthe Center-High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)(If equipped) with cargo.

To prevent damage or loss of cargo check now andthen to make sure the luggage and cargo are stillsecurely fastened and the crossrails are tight.

2-53

Stop Tabs

If your vehicle has a sunroof, it will have a crossrail stoptab placed in the siderail in the spot labeled SUNROOFSTOP. This tab prevents you from moving thecrossrails past the opening of the sunroof and loadingcargo too far forward.

Your vehicle will also have a stop tab in the crossrail inthe spot labeled OnSTAR STOP. This tab preventsloading cargo too close to the OnStar antenna which willcause the OnStar and navigation system (if equipped)to function improperly or not at all.

Vehicles with the off-road lamps will have additionalstop tabs placed in the siderails to prevent youfrom moving the lamps too far rearward, causing themto shine into the optional sunroof opening.

Crossrail Channels

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that does not have enoughclearance for any roof-mounted accessories (suchas off-road lamps or a roof basket) on your vehicle,you can damage your vehicle. To avoid damagingyour vehicle in a car wash, remove anyroof-mounted accessories if you can, and do notuse an automatic car wash while roof-mountedaccessories are on your vehicle. See Washing YourVehicle on page 5-94 for more information.

The crossrails have built in channels to allow you toattach other items designed for this system, suchas basket luggage carriers, bike racks, ski racks, etc.

2-54

To use the crossrail channels, do the following:

1. Use the included key to unlock the crossrail endcap by turning it counterclockwise. If you everlose a key, your dealer will be able to helpyou obtain a replacement.

2. Pull the end capstraight out from thecrossrail.

3. Peel back the rub strip from the crossrail.

4. Slide the accessory you are using into the crossrailchannel and secure it as the accessory instructionsdirect.

5. Place the crossrail endcap back on and lock it withthe key.

You will not be using the rub strip when using crossrailaccessories. When you remove any crossrailaccessory, be sure to reinstall the rub strip. To do this,press the rub strip in place until it seats into thechannel of the crossrail.

2-55

Rear Seat ArmrestYour vehicle is equipped with a rear armrest/cupholder.

To open it, pull up and then out on the tab, located at thetop center of the armrest, and pull the armrest down.

Cargo Tie Downs (SUT)

There are four oval shaped openings (A) in the cargobed that allow access to four tie downs. You canuse these tie downs to secure cargo.

All-Weather Cargo Area (SUT)Your vehicle is equipped with features to help it resistthe elements and protect cargo inside the cargo area.

Even when the water management system is workingproperly and the cover system is on, there may be someinstances (heavy rains, automated car washes, etc.)when water may be present in the following areas:

A. Drain Hole

2-56

Removal and CleaningTo ensure that the water management system performsproperly, be sure that the midgate, tailgate and coversystem are fully closed and that each element ofthe water management system is clean and not blockedwith debris. Follow the instruction given next in thissection for the proper procedures on cleaning each itemof the water management system.

Side Rail Channels

The side rail channels are located on top of both sidesof the roof and the cargo area. You may want toflush them out with clean water if you notice any debriscollecting inside of them.

When loading cargo into the cargo area, be careful notto damage the rails.

For more information on this feature see LuggageCarrier on page 2-52.

Cargo Area Floor Drains

Your vehicle also has four cargo-area floor drains (a)located under the cargo mat, if equipped, near the sidesof the cargo area. These drains should be cleanedperiodically to allow water to exit the cargo area.

The cargo mat has cutouts for the drains. You can flushthe drains through the cutouts, but if the cargo areais extremely dirty you can lift up the edges of the cargofloor mat or take the whole mat out and flush thedrains with water.

2-57

Tonneau Cover (SUT)

{CAUTION:

If you remove the tonneau cover, do not storeit in the vehicle without securing it to thevehicle. An improperly stored tonneau covercould be thrown about the vehicle during acollision or sudden maneuver. You or otherscould be injured. When you put the cover backon, always be sure that it is securelyreattached.

Your vehicle may have a hard tonneau cover, you canuse it to cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle. Your tonneau cover will have two lock cylinders on it.

One lock cylinder is to secure the cover closed and theother lock cylinder will allow you to secure the tailgateclosed.

2-58

You will be able to open the cover by turning the coverrelease latch in a clockwise direction, which will allowyou to lift the cover with the assistance of the struts.

Sunroof

The vehicle may have a power sliding sunroof. Theignition must be on or in the accessory position,or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active.See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-25.The switch used to operate the sunroof is located in theoverhead console.

2-59

Express-Open/Close SunroofThe sunroof has a feature which allows the sunroofpanel to be opened or closed without continuouslypressing the switch. The express-open can be stoppedat any time by pushing the front of the switch asecond time.

The sunroof has four positions:

• Comfort open stop: To open the sunroof andsunshade, press the rear of the switch quickly andrelease. The glass panel will open to an interimposition that reduces wind noise. For information onusing the sunshade, see “Sunshade Operation” later.

• Full open stop: To open the sunroof further, pressthe rear of the switch quickly once more.

• Express close: To close the sunroof, press the frontof the switch quickly and release.

• Vent: The vent position allows the rear of the sunroofto be opened and tilted upward. With the sunroof inthe fully closed position, press and hold the front ofthe switch until the sunroof reaches the desired ventposition or until it stops moving. To close the sunrooffrom the vent position, press and hold the rear of theswitch until the sunroof is fully closed.

Do not leave the sunroof open for long periods of timeas debris may collect in the tracks.

Jam Protection FeatureIf something gets caught between the glass panel androof frame while the sunroof is closing, the glasspanel will stop and open half way, and the deflector willraise fully.

If something gets caught between the glass panel andthe roof frame during the tilt down operation, theglass panel will stop and open fully.

If the sunroof panel receives a strong impact, the jamprotection feature may work even if nothing gets caughtbetween the glass panel and roof frame.

Do not to leave the sunroof open for long periods oftime as debris may collect in the tracks.

Sunshade OperationThe sunshade will open automatically when opening thesunroof.

However, it can manually be pulled shut after thesunroof is closed. To adjust the sunshade, push itbackward or pull it forward to the desired position. Thesunshade cannot be adjusted further than the currentclosed position of the sunroof.

Notice: If you force the sunshade forward of thesliding glass panel, damage will occur and thesunroof may not open or close properly. Alwaysclose the glass panel before closing the sunshade.

2-60

Vehicle Personalization

Memory Seat

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the controls for thememory function arelocated on the driver’s door.

These buttons are used to program and recall memorysettings for the driver’s seat and both the driver’sand passenger’s outside mirrors. The settings for thesefeatures can be saved for up to two drivers.

To store the memory settings, do the following:

1. While the vehicle is in PARK (P), adjust the driver’sseat, including the seatback recliner, lumbar, andside wing area, and both outside mirrors toyour preference.

2. Press and hold the 1 or 2 button of the memorycontrol for three seconds. A double chime willsound to let you know that the position has beenstored.

To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow thepreceding steps, but press the other numberedmemory control button.

Each time button 1 or 2 is pressed and released whilethe vehicle is in PARK (P), a single chime will sound andthe memory position will be recalled.

To stop recall movement of the memory seat feature atany time, press one of the memory buttons or powerseat controls.

2-61

Easy Exit SeatThe controls for this memory function are located on thedriver’s door.

B (Easy Exit Seat): This button is used to programand recall the desired driver’s seat position when exitingor entering the vehicle. The seat position can besaved for up to two drivers.

To store the seat exit position, do the following:

1. Press and release the 1 or 2 button. The seat willmove to the stored memory position.

2. Adjust the seat to the desired exit position.

3. Press and hold the exit button of the memorycontrol for three seconds. A double chime will soundto let you know that the position has been storedfor the selected button 1 or 2.To repeat the procedure for a second driver, followthe preceding steps, but press the other numberedmemory control button.

To use the seat exit position, do one of the following:

• Press the exit button on the memory control, or

• If this feature is activated in the DIC, removing thekey from the ignition will move the seat to the exitposition.

See “Easy Exit Seat” under DIC Vehicle Customizationon page 3-54 for more information on activating thisfeature in the DIC.

2-62

Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6Horn .............................................................3-6Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-7Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-8Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9Windshield Washer .........................................3-9Cruise Control ..............................................3-10Exterior Lamps .............................................3-13Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-15Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-15Automatic Headlamp System ..........................3-16Off-Road Lamps ...........................................3-17Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-17Dome Lamps ...............................................3-18Entry/Exit Lighting .........................................3-18Reading Lamps ............................................3-18Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-18Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-19Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-19

Climate Controls ............................................3-20Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...........3-20Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-25Climate Controls Personalization .....................3-26

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-26Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-27Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-28Tachometer .................................................3-28Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-28Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-29Airbag Off Light ............................................3-30Charging System Light ..................................3-31Voltmeter Gage ............................................3-32Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-32Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-34Traction Off Light ..........................................3-34Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-35Transmission Temperature Gage .....................3-35Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-37Oil Pressure Gage ........................................3-40Security Light ...............................................3-41Cruise Control Light ......................................3-41Highbeam On Light .......................................3-41Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................3-42Fuel Gage ...................................................3-42Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-43

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-1

Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-43DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-44DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-47DIC Vehicle Customization .............................3-54

Audio System(s) .............................................3-60Setting the Time ...........................................3-60Radio with Cassette and CD ..........................3-61Radio with Six-Disc CD .................................3-74Navigation/Radio System ...............................3-87

Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................3-87Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-89Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-89Radio Reception ...........................................3-90Care of the Cassette Tape Player ...................3-91Care of Your CDs .........................................3-92Care of the CD Player ...................................3-92Fixed Mast Antenna ......................................3-92Chime Level Adjustment ................................3-92

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-2

✍ NOTES

3-3

Instrument Panel Overview

3-4

The main components of your instrument panel are the following:

A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-25.B. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps

on page 3-13.C. OnStar® and Radio Steering Wheel Buttons. See

OnStar® System on page 2-45 and Audio SteeringWheel Controls on page 3-89.

D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument PanelCluster on page 3-27.

E. Locking Rear Axle and All-wheel Drive Buttons. SeeLocking Rear Axle on page 4-10 and All-WheelDrive on page 2-31.

F. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-60.G. Airbag Switch. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-65.H. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-51.I. Midgate Glass Up/Down Switch (SUT). See Midgate

(SUT) on page 2-12. Rear Wiper/Washer Switch(SUV). See Windshield Washer on page 3-9.

J. Dome Override Button. See Dome Lamps onpage 3-18.

K. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.

L. Tilt Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 3-6.

M. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) on page 3-43.

N. Parking Brake Release. See Parking Brake onpage 2-35.

O. Traction Control Button. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 4-9.

P. Tow/Haul Selector Button. See “Tow/Haul Mode”under Towing a Trailer on page 4-68.

Q. Ride Height Selector Button (If Equipped). SeeSelectable Extended Rear Ride Height on page 4-66.

R. Cigarette Lighter or Accessory Power Outlet (IfEquipped). See Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter onpage 3-19 Accessory Power Outlets on page 3-19.

S. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operationon page 2-27.

T. Accessory Power Outlets. See Accessory PowerOutlets on page 3-19.

U. OnStar Buttons. See OnStar® System on page 2-45.V. Rear Window Defogger Button. See “Rear Window

Defogger” under Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 3-20.

W. Climate Control System. See Dual AutomaticClimate Control System on page 3-20.

3-5

Hazard Warning FlashersYour hazard warning flashers let you warn others. Theyalso let police know you have a problem. Your frontand rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

The hazard warningflasher button is located ontop of the steeringcolumn.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition your key is in, and even if the key is not in theignition.

Press the button to make the front and rear turn signallamps flash on and off. Press the button again toturn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turnsignals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up atthe side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behindyour vehicle.

HornPress the vehicle’s steering wheel pad to sound the horn.

Tilt WheelThe tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steeringwheel before you drive. You can raise it to the highestlevel to give your legs more room when you enterand exit the vehicle.

The tilt lever is located on the driver’s side of thesteering column under the turn signal lever.To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull thelever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortablelevel, then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.

3-6

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

• G Turn and Lane Change Signals. Turn andLane-Change Signals on page 3-7.

• 53 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.

• Flash-to-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass onpage 3-8.

• N Windshield Wipers. See Windshield Wipers onpage 3-9.

• L Windshield Washer. See Windshield Washeron page 3-9.

• I Cruise Control. Cruise Control on page 3-10.

For information on the exterior lamps, see ExteriorLamps on page 3-13 later in this section.

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) and twodownward (for left) positions. These positions allow youto signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.When the turn is finished, the lever will returnautomatically.

To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the leveruntil the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until youcomplete your lane change. The lever will return by itselfwhen you release it.

An arrow on the instrumentpanel cluster will flash inthe direction of theturn or lane change.

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows flashmore quickly than normal, a signal bulb may be burnedout and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.

3-7

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signala turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a blown fuse.See Instrument Panel Fuse Block on page 5-101and Underhood Fuse Block on page 5-105.

Turn Signal On ChimeIf your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the turnsignal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON will alsoappear in the DIC. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 3-47. To turn the chime and message off, move theturn signal lever to the off position.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

53(Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer): Tochange the headlamps from low to high beam, push thelever toward the instrument panel. To return tolow-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever towardyou. Then release it.

When the high beams areon, this indicator light onthe instrument panelcluster will also be on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps tosignal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.It works even if your headlamps are in the automaticposition.

To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, thenrelease it.

If your headlamps are in the automatic position or onlow beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on.They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.The high-beam indicator on the instrument panelcluster will come on. Release the lever to return tonormal operation.

3-8

Windshield WipersYou control the windshield wipers by turning the bandwith the wiper symbol on it.

8(Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn the band tomist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go. Thewipers will stop after one wipe. If you want morewipes, hold the band on mist longer.

N(Delay): You can set the wiper speed for a long orshort delay between wipes. This can be very usefulin light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delaytime. The closer to the top of the lever, the shorterthe delay.

6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed,turn the band away from you to the first solid band pastthe delay settings.

1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping, turn theband further, to the second solid band past thedelay settings.

9(Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.

Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper bladesbefore using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do becomeworn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.

Windshield Washer

LQ (Washer Fluid): There is a paddle markedwith the windshield washer symbol at the top ofthe multifunction lever. To spray washer fluid on thewindshield, push the paddle. The wipers will clearthe window and then either stop or return to yourpreset speed.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use your washeruntil the windshield is warmed. Otherwise thewasher fluid can form ice on the windshield,blocking your vision.

3-9

Rear Window Washer/Wiper (SUV)

If your vehicle has a rearwindow washer/wiper, thisknob is located on theinstrument panel to the leftof the steering wheel.

To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob to either 1 or 2.For long delayed wiping, turn the knob to 1. For shortdelayed wiping, turn the knob to 2.

9(Off): To turn the wiper off, turn the knob to thissymbol.

=(Washer Fluid): To wash the window, press theknob with this symbol.

The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle asthe windshield washer. However, the rear windowwasher will run out of fluid before the windshield washer.If you can wash your windshield but not your rearwindows, check the fluid level.

Cruise Control

9(Off): This positionturns the system off.

R(On): This position activates the system.

+ (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever to this symbolto make the vehicle accelerate or resume to apreviously set speed.

3-10

T(Set): Press this button to set the speed.

With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your footon the accelerator. This can really help on longtrips. Cruise control does not work at speeds belowabout 25 mph (40 km/h).

If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous where youcannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, donot use your cruise control on winding roadsor in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous on slipperyroads. On such roads, fast changes in tiretraction can cause needless wheel spinning,and you could lose control. Do not use cruisecontrol on slippery roads.

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on when youare not using cruise, you might hit a buttonand go into cruise when you do not want to.You could be startled and even lose control.Keep the cruise control switch off until youwant to use cruise control.

1. Move the cruise control switch to on.

2. Get up to the speed you want.

3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever andrelease it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

The cruise symbol on theinstrument panel willilluminate when the cruisecontrol is engaged.

3-11

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your cruise control at a desired speedand then you apply the brake. This, of course,disengages the cruise control. But you don’t need toreset it.

Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, youcan move the cruise control switch briefly from on toresume/accelerate.

You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed andstay there.

If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehiclewill keep going faster until you release the switch orapply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’thold the switch at resume/accelerate.

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed:

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higherspeed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,then release the button and the acceleratorpedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed. If theaccelerator pedal is held longer than 60 seconds,cruise control will turn off.

• Move the cruise switch from on toresume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up tothe speed you want, and then release the switch.To increase your speed in very small amounts,move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate. Eachtime you do this, your vehicle will go about1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControl• Press in the button at the end of the lever until you

reach the lower speed you want, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly pressthe set button. Each time you do this, you’ll goabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle willslow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.

3-12

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control will work on hills dependsupon your speed, load and the steepness of thehills. When going up steep hills, you may want to stepon the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift toa lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Manydrivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t usecruise control on steep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are four ways to turn off the cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal,

• move the cruise control switch to off, or

• shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).

• If road conditions cause the traction control systemto activate, cruise control will turn off. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 4-9.

• If the accelerator pedal is held for 60 seconds orlonger, cruise control will turn off.

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, yourcruise control set speed memory is erased.

Exterior Lamps

The control on the driver’s side of your instrument paneloperates the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp control has four positions:

9(Off): Turn the knob to this position to turn off allexterior lamps including the DRL. This is a momentarycontrol that will spring back to AUTO when released.

3-13

AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this position toput the system into automatic headlamp mode.AUTO mode, if enabled, will turn the exterior lamps,including your DRL, on and off automatically dependingon how much light is available outside the vehicle.

Due to the momentary switch design, your automaticlights may be disabled even if the control is in the AUTOposition.To enable automatic lighting, do any of the following:

• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to offand release the control. It will return back tothe AUTO position by itself.

• Turn the headlamp control from the parking lampposition to AUTO.

• Turn the headlamp control from the headlampposition to AUTO.

• Turn your engine off and then on again with theheadlamp control in AUTO.

To disable automatic lighting, do any of the following:

• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to offand release the control. It will return back tothe AUTO position by itself.

• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to theparking lamp position.

• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to theheadlamp position.

;(Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this position toturn on the parking lamps, together with the following:

• Sidemarker Lamps

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Roof Marker Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

2(Headlamps): Turn the control to this position toturn on the headlamps, together with the previouslylisted lamps and lights.

When the vehicle is turned off and the headlamps are inAUTO, the headlamps may automatically remain onfor a set time. You can change this delay time using theDIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-43.

You can switch your headlamps from low to high-beamby pushing the turn signal/multifunction lever towardthe instrument panel.

3-14

Headlamps on ReminderIf a door is open, a reminder chime will sound when yourheadlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on andyour key is out of the ignition. To turn off the chime, turnthe headlamp switch to off or AUTO and then back on. Inthe AUTO mode, the headlamps turn off once the ignitionis in LOCK or may remain on until the headlamp delayends (if enabled in the DIC).

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier forothers to see the front of your vehicle during theday. DRL can be helpful in many different drivingconditions, but they can be especially helpful in the shortperiods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functionaldaytime running lamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

The DRL system will come on when the followingconditions are met:

• The ignition is on,

• the exterior lamps control is in AUTO, if enabled,

• the transmission is not in PARK (P), and

• the light sensor determines it is daytime.

When the DRL are on, only your DRL lamps will be on.The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t beon. The instrument panel won’t be lit up either.

When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlampsystem will switch from DRL to the headlamps.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regularheadlamp system when you need it.

3-15

Automatic Headlamp SystemWhen it is dark enough outside and the headlampswitch is in AUTO, your automatic headlamp system willturn on your headlamps at the normal brightnessalong with other lamps such as the taillamps,sidemarker, parking lamps, roof marker lamps and theinstrument panel lights. The radio lights will also be dim.

To turn off the automatic headlamp system, turn theexterior lamps switch to the off position and thenrelease. Turning off the automatic headlamp systemwith the headlamp switch is not available for vehiclesfirst sold in Canada. For vehicles first sold in Canada,you can turn off the automatic headlamp systemwhen parked at night by applying the parking brakebefore starting your vehicle. The headlamps will remainoff once the vehicle is started for as long as you areparked. If you release the parking brake, the lights willturn on. If the parking brake is not released beforeyou begin to drive, the exterior lamps will turn on above2 mph (3.2 km/h).

Your vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of theinstrument panel. Be sure it is not covered, or thesystem will be on whenever the ignition is on.

The system may also turn on your headlamps whendriving through a parking garage, heavy overcastweather or a tunnel. This is normal.

There is a delay in the transition between the daytimeand nighttime operation of the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems sothat driving under bridges or bright overhead streetlights does not affect the system. The DRL andautomatic headlamp system will only be affected whenthe light sensor sees a change in lighting lastinglonger than the delay.

If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automaticheadlamp system will come on immediately. Onceyou leave the garage, it will take approximatelyone minute for the automatic headlamp system tochange to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,your instrument panel cluster may not be as brightas usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightnesscontrol is in the full bright position. See Instrument PanelBrightness on page 3-17.

3-16

Off-Road LampsNotice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that does not have enoughclearance for any roof-mounted accessories (suchas off-road lamps or a roof basket) on your vehicle,you can damage your vehicle. To avoid damagingyour vehicle in a car wash, remove anyroof-mounted accessories if you can, and do notuse an automatic car wash while roof-mountedaccessories are on your vehicle. See Washing YourVehicle on page 5-94 for more information.

The off-road lamps, if equipped, provide auxiliarylighting when your vehicle is used off road. These lampsare not intended to be used in conjunction with, or inplace of, existing vehicle lighting. The lamps are not tobe used on any public street or highway and are tobe covered when not in use. Check your state and locallaws before installing or using any auxiliary lighting.In some states it may be necessary to remove the rooflamps when operating the vehicle on the highway.

The button for the off-road lamps is located in theoverhead console.

To use the lamps, be sure the engine is running.Remove the covers from the lamps and press the buttonto turn them on. Press the button again to turn themoff. An indicator light will glow near the button when thelamps are on.

Notice: Turning on the off-road lamps beforeremoving the lamp covers could damage theoff-road lamps and the covers. Always return thelamps to the upright position and remove the coversbefore turning on the off-road lamps.

The off-road lamps will remain on even after the ignitionis turned off. The off-road lamps button must bepressed to turn them off.

Instrument Panel BrightnessThe thumbwheel for this feature is located next to theexterior lamps control.

D (Instrument Panel Lights): Turn the thumbwheelup or down to brighten or dim the instrument panellights and the radio display. This will only work ifthe headlamps or parking lamps are on.

To turn on the dome lamps, with the vehicle doorsclosed, turn the thumbwheel all the way up.

3-17

Dome LampsThe dome lamps will come on when you open a door orthe midgate, if equipped, and will turn off when alldoors or midgate are closed.

You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning thethumbwheel, located next to the exterior lamp control, allthe way up. In this position, the dome lamps willremain on whether a door is opened or closed.

E (Dome Override): Press this button, located belowthe exterior lamp control, to turn dome lamps off evenwhile a door is opened. To return the lamps to automaticoperation, press the button again and it will return tothe out position. In this position, the dome lampswill come on when you open a door.

Entry/Exit LightingYour vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry/exitfeature.

When a door is opened or the key is removed from theignition, the dome lamps will come on if the domeoverride button is in the out position.

Reading Lamps

Your vehicle has reading lamps located in the overheadconsole. Press the button located next to the lamp toturn it on. The lamps can be adjusted to point inthe direction you want.

Press the button again to turn the lamp off.

These lamps will also come on with the dome lamps.

Battery Run-Down ProtectionThis feature shuts off the dome lamps if they are left onfor more than 10 minutes when the ignition is inLOCK. This will keep your battery from running down.

3-18

Accessory Power OutletsYour vehicle may be equipped with up to five accessorypower outlets. The two front outlets, if equipped, arelocated under the OnStar® buttons on the instrumentpanel behind hinged doors.

The two middle outlets, if equipped, are located on theback of the center console.

There may also be an outlet located in the rear of thevehicle near the liftgate. Remove the cap to use theoutlet. Replace the cap when the outlet is not in use.

If your vehicle is the SUT model, there is an outlet in therear cargo area on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to yourvehicle may damage it or keep other componentsfrom working as they should. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Check with yourdealer before adding electrical equipment.

Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatibleto the accessory power outlets and could result inblown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience aproblem, see your dealer for additional information onthe accessory power plugs.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can causedamage not covered by your warranty. Do nothang any type of accessory or accessory bracketfrom the plug because the power outlets aredesigned for accessory power plugs only.

Ashtrays and Cigarette LighterIf your vehicle has an ashtray, it is removable and fitsinto the front cupholder. Pull up on the ashtray doorto open it.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammableitems in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignite them and possiblydamage your vehicle. Never put flammable items inthe ashtray.

To remove the ashtray, pull it out from the console. Toreinstall the ashtray, slide it back to the original position.

To use the cigarette lighter, if equipped, push it in allthe way, and let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back outby itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it isheating will not allow the lighter to back away fromthe heating element when it is hot. Damage fromoverheating may occur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold acigarette lighter in while it is heating.

3-19

Climate Controls

Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystemWith this system, you can control the heating, coolingand ventilation in your vehicle.

You can select different climate control settings for thedriver and passengers.

Driver’s Side Temperature KnobThe driver’s side knob is used to adjust the temperatureof the air coming through the system on the driver’sside. The temperature can be adjusted even if thesystem is turned off. This is possible since outside air

will always flow through the system as the vehicle ismoving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode.See “Recirculation” later in this section.

Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to lower orincrease the cabin temperature. The display will showthe temperature setting decreasing or increasing and anarrow pointing to the driver will be displayed underand to the left of the temperature setting.

Passenger’s Side Temperature KnobThe passenger’s side knob can be used to change thetemperature of the air coming through the systemon the passenger’s side of the vehicle. The temperaturecan be adjusted even if the system is turned off. Thisis possible since outside air will always flow through thesystem as the vehicle is moving forward unless it isset to recirculation mode. See “Recirculation” later in thissection.

Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to lower orincrease the cabin temperature. The display will showthe temperature setting decreasing or increasing and anarrow pointing to the passenger will be displayedunder and to the right of the temperature setting.

The passenger’s temperature setting can be set tomatch the driver’s temperature setting by pressing andholding the AUTO button for four seconds. Both thedriver and passenger arrows will be displayed.

3-20

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation isactive the system will control the inside temperature, theair delivery, and the fan speed.

Use the steps below to place the entire system inautomatic mode:

1. Press the AUTO button.When AUTO is selected, the display will change toshow the current driver’s set temperature, deliverymode and fan speed. Press the AUTO button againwithin five seconds to display the passenger’s settemperature.If the driver and passenger’s temperature settingsare not the same, the opposite side temperaturesetting will be displayed for an additional fiveseconds. To make the passenger’s temperature thesame as the driver’s press and hold the AUTObutton for about four seconds.When auto is selected, the air conditioning operationand air inlet will be automatically controlled. Theair conditioning compressor will run when theoutside temperature is over about 40°F (4°C). Theair inlet will normally be set to outside air. If it’shot outside, the air inlet may automatically switch torecirculate inside air to help quickly cool downyour vehicle. The light on the button will illuminatein recirculation.

2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.To find your comfort setting, start with a 74°F (23°C)temperature setting and allow about 20 minutesfor the system to regulate. Turn the driver’s orpassenger’s side temperature knob to adjust thetemperature setting as necessary. If you choose thetemperature setting of 60°F (15°C) the systemwill remain at the maximum cooling setting. If youchoose the temperature setting of 90°F (32°C)the system will remain at the maximum heat setting.Choosing either maximum setting will not causethe vehicle to heat or cool any faster.Be careful not to cover the sensor located on thetop of the instrument panel near the windshield. Thissensor regulates air temperature based on sunload, and also turns on your headlamps.To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, thesystem will delay turning on the fan until warm air isavailable. The length of delay depends on theengine coolant temperature. Pressing the fan switchwill override this delay and change the fan to aselected speed.

3-21

9(Off): Press this button to turn off the entire climatecontrol system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle, andwill be directed to the floor. This direction can be changedby pressing the mode button. The temperature can alsobe adjusted using either temperature knob. Press the upor down arrows on the fan switch, the defrost button, theAUTO button, or the air conditioning button to turn thesystem on when it is off.

Manual OperationYou may manually adjust the air delivery mode or fanspeed.

w9x (Fan): The switch with the fan symbol allowsyou to manually adjust the fan speed. Press the uparrow to increase fan speed and the down arrowto decrease fan speed.

Pressing this button when the system is off will turn thesystem on.

C (Mode): Press this button to manually change thedirection of the airflow in your vehicle; keep pressing thebutton until the desired mode appears on the display.

If you press the mode button to select an air deliverymode, the display will change to show you the selectedair mode delivery. The display will then show thecurrent status of the system. When the system is turnedoff, the display will go blank after displaying thecurrent status of the system.

H (Panel): This setting will deliver air to theinstrument panel outlets.

)(Bi-Level): This setting will deliver warmer air to thefloor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets.

6 (Floor): This setting will deliver air to the flooroutlets.

- (Defog): See “Defogging and Defrosting” later inthis section.

@(Recirculation): Press this button to limit theamount of outside air entering your vehicle. The light onthe recirculation button will glow. This is helpful when youare trying to limit odors entering your vehicle and formaximum air conditioning performance in hot weather.Press this button again to allow outside air to enter thevehicle. The light on the recirculation button will go off.

Pressing this button also cancels the auto recirculationfeature. To resume the auto recirculation function, pressthe AUTO button. Each time the vehicle is started, thesystem will revert to the auto recirculation function.

If you select recirculation while in defrost, defog or floor,the light in the button will flash and then go out to let youknow that this is not allowed. This is normal and helps toprevent fogging.

3-22

When the weather is cool or damp, operating the systemin recirculation for extended periods of time may causefogging of the vehicle’s windows. To clear the fog, selecteither defog or front defrost.

You may also notice that the A/C compressor will runwhile in recirculation mode. This is normal and helps toprevent fogging.

9(Off): Press this button to turn off the entire climatecontrol system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle, andwill be directed to the floor. This direction can be changedby pressing the mode button. The temperature can alsobe adjusted using either temperature knob. Press the upor down arrows on the fan switch, the defrost button, theAUTO button, or the air conditioning button to turn thesystem on when it is off.

DisplayIf you press the MODE button to select an air deliverymode, the display will change to show you the selectedair delivery mode. After ten seconds, the display willchange to show the driver temperature setting and theselected mode.

If you press the up or down arrows on the fan switch,the display will change to show the selected fan speed.After ten seconds, the display will change to showthe driver temperature setting and the selected mode.

Whenever you press AUTO, the display will change toshow the following:

• the current driver’s set temperature and an arrowfor five seconds,

• the current passenger’s set temperature setting andan arrow for five seconds and

• the automatic air delivery mode and fan speed.

If the driver’s and passenger’s temperature settings arethe same when AUTO is pressed, the temperature settingand both arrows will be displayed for five seconds alongwith the automatic air delivery mode and fan speed. Afterthe five second update, the display will change to showthe temperature setting, both arrows and AUTO.

Air Conditioning

#(Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the airconditioning (A/C) compressor on and off. The snowflakesymbol will appear on the display when the A/C is on.

Pressing this button when the outside temperature is toocool for air conditioning to be effective will make thesnowflake symbol flash three times and then turn off to letyou know that the air conditioning mode is not available. Ifthe air conditioning is on and the outside temperaturedrops below a temperature which is too cool for airconditioning to be effective, the snowflake symbol willturn off to let you know that the air conditioning mode hasbeen canceled.

3-23

^ (Air Conditioning Off): On some vehicles, whenyou turn the air conditioning off, this symbol will appearon the display. If your vehicle does not have thissymbol, the snowflake symbol will turn off to let youknow the air conditioning is off.

When air conditioning is selected or in AUTO mode, thesystem will run the air conditioning automatically to cooland dehumidify the air entering the vehicle. If you selectA/C off while in front defrost, defog or recirculation, theA/C snowflake symbol will turn off, but the A/Ccompressor will still run to help prevent fogging.

On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hotinside air escape. This reduces the time it takes foryour vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windowsclosed for the air conditioner to work its best.

On cool, but sunny days while using manual operationof the automatic system, use bi-level to deliver warmair to the floor and cooler air to the instrumentpanel outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered, turn thetemperature knob to the desired setting.

In AUTO mode the system will cool and dehumidify theair inside the vehicle. Also while in AUTO mode, thesystem will maximize its performance by usingrecirculation as necessary.

HeatingOn cold days when using manual operation of theautomatic system, choose floor mode to deliver air tothe floor outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered, turnthe temperature knob to the desired setting.

If you want to use the automatic mode, press AUTO andadjust the temperature by turning the temperature knob.

The heater works best if you keep the windows closedwhile using it.

Defogging and DefrostingYou can use either defog or front defrost to clear fog orfrost from your windshield. Use the defog mode toclear the windows of fog or moisture. Use the frontdefrost button to defrost the front windshield.

-(Defog): Use this setting to clear the windows of fogor moisture. Press the mode button to select thissetting. This setting will deliver air to the floor andwindshield outlets.

0 (Front Defrost): Press the front defrost button todefrost the windshield. The system will automaticallycontrol the fan speed if you select defrost from AUTOmode. If the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or warmer,your air conditioning compressor will automatically run tohelp dehumidify the air and dry the windshield.

3-24

Rear Window DefoggerIf your vehicle has this feature, the lines you see on therear window warm the glass. The rear windowdefogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from therear window.

<(Rear): Press this button to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator light in the buttonwill come on to let you know that the rear windowdefogger is activated.

The rear window defogger will turn off about 10 minutesafter the button is pressed. If you need additionalwarming time, press the button again.

If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors thisbutton will activate them.

Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clearthe inside rear window may damage the rearwindow defogger. Repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Do not clear the inside of the rearwindow with sharp objects.

Outlet AdjustmentYour vehicle has air outlets that allow you to adjust thedirection and amount of airflow inside the vehicle.Push the knob in the center of the outlet up, down, leftor right to move the outlet in the direction you wouldlike. Turn the knob in the center of the outlet sothe louvers open or close to increase or decreaseairflow.

Operation Tips• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow,

or any other obstruction (such as leaves). Theheater and defroster will work far better, reducingthe chance of fogging the inside of your windows.

• Keep the air path under the front seats clearof objects. This helps air to circulate throughout yourvehicle.

• Adding outside equipment to the front of yourvehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, etc., may affectthe performance of the heating and air conditioningsystem. Check with your dealer before addingequipment to the outside of your vehicle.

3-25

Climate Controls PersonalizationThe electronic climate control system can storeand recall the climate control settings for temperature,air delivery mode, and fan speed for two differentdrivers. The personal choice settings recalled aredetermined by the transmitter used to enter the vehicle.

After the button with the unlock symbol on a remotekeyless entry transmitter is pressed, the climate controlwill adjust to the last settings of the identified driver.The settings can also be changed by pressing one of thememory buttons (1 or 2) located on the driver’s door.When adjustments are made, the new settings areautomatically saved for that driver.

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gages onyour vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that something iswrong before it becomes serious enough to causean expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention toyour warning lights and gages could also save youor others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you willsee in the details on the next few pages, somewarning lights come on briefly when you start theengine just to let you know they’re working. If you arefamiliar with this section, you should not be alarmedwhen this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problemwith one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gagesand warning lights work together to let you know whenthere’s a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on and stays onwhen you are driving, or when one of the gages showsthere may be a problem, check the section that tells youwhat to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costly – and evendangerous. So please get to know your warning lightsand gages. They’re a big help.

Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center (DIC)that works along with warning lights and gages.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-47.

3-26

Instrument Panel Cluster

United States version shown, Canada similar

3-27

Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at aglance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know howfast you’re going, about how much fuel you haveand many other things you’ll need to know to drive safelyand economically.

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed in bothmiles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).

Your vehicle’s odometer works together with thedriver information center. You can set a Trip A and TripB odometer. See “Trip Information” under DICOperation and Displays on page 3-44.

The odometer mileage can be checked without thevehicle running. Simply press the trip stem on theinstrument panel cluster.

If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, thenew one will be set to the correct mileage total of theold odometer.

TachometerYour tachometer displays the engine speed inrevolutions per minute (rpm).

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime willbe provided for several seconds to remind people tobuckle their safety belts. The driver safety belt light willalso be provided and stay on for several seconds,then it will flash for several more. You should buckleyour seat belt.

This chime and light will berepeated if the driverremains unbuckled and thevehicle is in motion.

If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor thelight will be provided.

3-28

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on the instrumentpanel, which shows the airbag symbol. The systemchecks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.The system check includes the airbag sensors, theairbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing anddiagnostic module. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag System on page 1-58.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flash fora few seconds. Then thelight should go out. Thismeans the system is ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start thevehicle or comes on when you are driving, yourairbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicleserviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle, it means the airbag systemmay not be working properly. The airbags inyour vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or theycould even inflate without a crash. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others, have yourvehicle serviced right away if the airbagreadiness light stays on after you start yourvehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If thelight doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn you if there is a problem.

3-29

Airbag Off LightWhen you turn the right front passenger’s airbag off,this light will come on and stay on to remind you that theairbag has been turned off. This light will go off whenyou turn the airbag back on again. See Airbag OffSwitch on page 1-65 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

{CAUTION:

If the right front passenger’s airbag is turnedoff for a person who is not in a risk groupidentified by the national government, thatperson will not have the extra protection of anairbag. In a crash, the airbag will not be able toinflate and help protect the person sittingthere. Do not turn off the passenger’s airbagunless the person sitting there is in a riskgroup. See ″Airbag Off Switch ″ in the Index formore on this, including important safetyinformation.


3-30

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light ever comes onwhen you have turned off the airbag, it meansthat something may be wrong with the airbagsystem. The right front passenger’s airbagcould inflate even though the switch is off. Ifthis ever happens, do not let anyone whom thenational government has identified as amember of a passenger airbag risk group sit inthe right front passenger’s position (forexample, do not secure a rear-facing childrestraint in the right front passenger’s seat)until you have your vehicle serviced. SeeAirbag Off Switch on page 1-65, for more onthis, including important safety information.

Charging System Light

The charging system lightwill come on briefly whenyou turn on the ignition,but the engine is notrunning, as a check toshow you it is working.

It should go out once the engine is running. If it stayson, or comes on while you are driving, you may have aproblem with the charging system. It could indicatethat you have problems with a generator drive belt, oranother electrical problem. Have it checked rightaway. Driving while this light is on could drain yourbattery.

When this light comes on the DIC will also display thebattery not charging message. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 3-47.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on, becertain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

3-31

Voltmeter Gage

When your engine is notrunning, but the ignition isin RUN, this gageshows your battery’s stateof charge in DC volts.

When the engine is running, the gage shows thecondition of the charging system. Readings between thelow and high warning zones indicate the normaloperating range.

Readings in the low warning zone may occur when alarge number of electrical accessories are operating inthe vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for anextended period. This condition is normal since thecharging system is not able to provide full powerat engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, thiscondition should correct itself as higher engine speedsallow the charging system to create maximum power.

You can only drive for a short time with the reading ineither warning zone. If you must drive, turn off allunnecessary accessories.

Readings in either warning zone indicate a possibleproblem in the electrical system. Have the vehicleserviced as soon as possible.

Brake System Warning LightWith the ignition on, the brake system warning light willflash when you set the parking brake. The light will flash ifthe parking brake doesn’t release fully. If you try to drivewith the parking brake engaged, a chime will sound whenthe vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).

Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into twoparts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can stillwork and stop you. For good braking, though, you needboth parts working well.

If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds therecould be a brake problem. Have your brake systeminspected right away.

3-32

This light should come on briefly when you turn theignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s aproblem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off theroad and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal isharder to push or may go closer to the floor. It maytake longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicletowed for service. See Towing Your Vehicle onpage 4-64.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning light ison. Driving with the brake system warning lighton can lead to an accident. If the light is stillon after you have pulled off the road andstopped carefully, have the vehicle towed forservice.


3-33

Anti-Lock Brake System WarningLight

With the anti-lock brakesystem, this light will comeon when you start yourengine and may stay on forseveral seconds.

That’s normal. If the light doesn’t come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is aproblem.

If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,your vehicle needs service. You will also hear achime sound when the light is on steady. If the regularbrake system warning light isn’t on, you still havebrakes, but you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If theregular brake system warning light is also on you don’thave anti-lock brakes and there’s a problem withyour regular brakes. In addition to both lights, you willalso hear a chime sound on the first occurrence ofa problem and each time the vehicle is shut off and thenrestarted. See Brake System Warning Light onpage 3-32.

Traction Off Light

The traction off light willcome on when a tractioncontrol system or anti-lockbrake system problemhas been detected.The vehicle may needservice.

When this light is on, the system will not limit wheelspin. Adjust your driving accordingly. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 4-9.

If the Traction Control System (TCS) detects that thevehicle’s brake’s are overheating, the TCS will shut offand the traction off light will come on. When thebrakes cool off, the TCS will turn back on automaticallyand the traction off light will go out.

3-34

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.

It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle isworking. During a majority of the operation, the gagewill read 210°F (100°C) or less. If you are pulling a loador going up hills, it is normal for the temperature tofluctuate and approach the 250°F (122°C) mark. If thegage reaches the 260°F (125°C) mark, it indicatesthat the cooling system is working beyond its capacity.

See Engine Overheating on page 5-26.

Transmission Temperature Gage

Your vehicle is equipped with a transmissiontemperature gage.

When your ignition is on, the gage shows the temperatureof the transmission fluid. The normal operating range isfrom 100°F (38°C) to about 265°F (130°C).

United States Canada United States Canada

3-35

At approximately 265°F (130°C), the DIC will display aTRANSMISSION HOT message and the transmissionwill enter a transmission protection mode. Whenthe transmission enters the protection mode, you maynotice a change in the transmission shifting patterns.The transmission will return to normal shifting patternswhen the transmission fluid temperature falls below260°F (127°C).

If the transmission fluid reaches temperatures ofapproximately 275°F (135°C) or greater, the DIC willdisplay a TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE warning messageand a chime will sound. Pull the vehicle off theroadway when it is safe to do so. Set the parking brake,place the transmission in PARK (P) and allow theengine to idle until the transmission temperature fallsbelow 260°F (127°C). If the transmission continuesto operate above 265°F (130°C), please contact yournearest dealer or the GM Roadside Assistance Center.

See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-43for further information.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle with thetransmission temperature gage above normaloperating range, you can damage the transmission.This could lead to costly repairs that would notbe covered by your warranty. Do not drive yourvehicle while the transmission temperature gagereading is above normal. See your dealer for service.

The following situations can cause the transmission tooperate at higher temperatures:

• Towing a trailer,

• hot outside air temperatures,

• hauling a large or heavy load,

• low transmission fluid level,

• high transmission fluid level,

• restricted air flow to the radiator.

A temporary solution to hotter transmission operatingtemperatures may be to let the transmission cool down.If the transmission is operated at higher temperatureson a frequent basis, see Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-4 for the proper transmission maintenanceintervals.

3-36

Malfunction Indicator LampCheck Engine Light

Your vehicle is equippedwith a computer whichmonitors operation of thefuel, ignition, and emissioncontrol systems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended toassure that emissions are at acceptable levels for thelife of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleanerenvironment. The check engine light comes on toindicate that there is a problem and service is required.Malfunctions often will be indicated by the systembefore any problem is apparent. This may prevent moreserious damage to your vehicle. This system is alsodesigned to assist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with thislight on, after awhile, your emission controlsmay not work as well, your fuel economy may notbe as good, and your engine may not run assmoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that maynot be covered by your warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system ofyour vehicle or the replacement of the original tireswith other than those of the same Tire PerformanceCriteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emissioncontrols and may cause this light to come on.Modifications to these systems could lead to costlyrepairs not covered by your warranty. This mayalso result in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test.

This light should come on, as a check to show you it isworking, when the ignition is on and the engine isnot running. If the light does not come on, have itrepaired. This light will also come on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has beendetected. A misfire increases vehicle emissionsand may damage the emission control system onyour vehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

• Light On Steady — An emission control systemmalfunction has been detected on your vehicle.Diagnosis and service may be required.

3-37

If the Light is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damage toyour vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount ofcargo being hauled as soon as it is possible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see“If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restartthe engine. If the light remains on steady, see “Ifthe Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is stillflashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealerfor service as soon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully installthe cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-7. Thediagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed. A loose or missingfuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the cap properly installedshould turn the light off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. The conditionwill usually be corrected when the electrical systemdries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. SeeGasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality willcause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stallingwhen you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitationon acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)This will be detected by the system and cause thelight to turn on.

3-38

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require at leastone full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.

If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer hasthe proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problems that may havedeveloped.

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments have ormay begin programs to inspect the emission controlequipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass thisinspection could prevent you from getting a vehicleregistration.

Here are some things you need to know to help yourvehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the checkengine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD(on-board diagnostic) system determines that criticalemission control systems have not been completelydiagnosed by the system. The vehicle would beconsidered not ready for inspection. This can happen ifyou have recently replaced your battery or if yourbattery has run down. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this and your vehiclestill does not pass the inspection for lack of OBDsystem readiness, your GM dealer can prepare thevehicle for inspection.

3-39

Oil Pressure Gage

The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure inpsi (pounds per square inch) when the engine isrunning. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure inkPa (kilopascals).

Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outsidetemperature and oil viscosity, but readings above thelow pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.

A reading in the low pressure zone may be causedby a dangerously low oil level or some other problemcausing low oil pressure. Check your oil as soonas possible. See Engine Oil on page 5-13.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. Ifyou do, your engine can become so hot that itcatches fire. You or others could be burned.Check your oil as soon as possible and haveyour vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance maydamage the engine. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Always follow themaintenance schedule in this manual for changingengine oil.


3-40

Security Light

This light will come onbriefly when you turn thekey toward START.The light will stay on untilthe engine starts.

If the light flashes, the Passlock® system has entered atamper mode. If the vehicle fails to start, see Passlock®

on page 2-23.

If the light comes on continuously while driving andstays on, there may be a problem with the Passlock®

system. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock®,and you should see your dealer.

Also, see Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-21 foradditional information regarding the security light.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise light comes onwhenever you set yourcruise control. See “CruiseControl” under TurnSignal/Multifunction Leveron page 3-7.

Highbeam On Light

This light will come onwhen the high-beamheadlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.

3-41

Tow/Haul Mode Light

This light is displayedwhen the tow/haul modehas been activated.

For more information, see “Tow/Haul Mode” underTowing a Trailer on page 4-68.

Fuel Gage

When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you abouthow much fuel you have left in your tank.

The gage will first indicate empty before you are out offuel, and you should get more fuel as soon aspossible.


3-42

Here are some situations you may experience with yourfuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with thefuel gage.

• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off beforethe gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than thefuel gage indicated. For example, the gage mayhave indicated the tank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less than half the tank’scapacity to fill the tank.

• The gage goes back to empty when you turn off theignition.

Low Fuel Warning LightThe light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly whenyou are starting the engine.

This light comes on and a FUEL LEVEL LOW messagewill appear on the Driver Information Center whenthe fuel tank is low on fuel. To turn it off, add fuel to thefuel tank. See Fuel on page 5-5 and DIC Warningsand Messages on page 3-47 for more information.

Driver Information Center (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC) display is locatedon the instrument panel cluster, below the speedometer.The DIC buttons are located on the steering wheel.The DIC can display information such as the tripodometer, fuel economy, customization features andwarning/status messages.

A 3 (Trip Information): Press this button to displaythe odometer, trip odometers, timer, and enginehours.

B t (Fuel Information): Press this button to displaythe current range, fuel used, average fuel economy, andengine oil life.

3-43

C 4 (Customization): Press this button to access thevehicle settings menu and customize the personalsettings on your vehicle.

D r (Select): Press this button to reset certain DICfunctions and set your customization settings.

Pressing any of the four DIC buttons or the trip odometerreset stem will acknowledge DIC messages and clearthem from the DIC display.

DIC Operation and DisplaysThe Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on when theignition is on. After a short delay, the DIC will displaythe information that was last displayed before the enginewas turned off.

The DIC has different modes which can be accessed bypressing the four DIC buttons located on the steeringwheel. These buttons are trip information, fuelinformation, customization and select. The buttonfunctions are detailed in the following pages.

Trip Information Button

3 (Trip Information): Press the trip informationbutton to scroll through the ODOMETER, TRIP A,TRIP B, TIMER, and ENGINE HOURS.

Odometer: Press the trip information button untilODOMETER appears on the display. This mode showsthe total distance the vehicle has been driven ineither miles or kilometers. Pressing the reset stemlocated on the instrument cluster with the vehicle off willalso display the odometer.

Trip A: Press the trip information button until TRIP Aappears on the display. This mode shows the currentdistance traveled since the last reset for TRIP A in eithermiles or kilometers.

Trip B: Press the trip information button until TRIP Bappears on the display. This mode shows the currentdistance traveled since the last reset for TRIP B in eithermiles or kilometers.

To reset TRIP A or TRIP B information, press and holdthe select button for one second while in one of thetrip modes. This will reset the information for TRIP A orTRIP B.

You can also reset TRIP A or TRIP B while they aredisplayed by pressing the reset stem on the cluster. Ifyou press and hold the reset stem or the selectbutton for four seconds, the display will show thedistance traveled since the last ignition cycle for TRIP Aor TRIP B.

3-44

Timer: The DIC can be used as a timer. Press theselect button while TIMER is displayed to start the timer.The display will show the amount of time that haspassed since the timer was last reset, not including timethe ignition is off. Time will continue to be counted aslong as the ignition is on, even if another display is beingshown on the DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours,59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after whichthe display will roll back to zero.

To stop the counting of time, press the select buttonbriefly while TIMER is displayed.

To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the selectbutton while TIMER is displayed.

Engine Hours: Press the trip information button untilENGINE HOURS appears on the display. Thismode shows the total number of hours the engine hasrun. Pressing and holding the reset stem located onthe instrument cluster for about four seconds will alsodisplay the engine hour information after the odometer isdisplayed when the vehicle is off.

Fuel Information Button

t (Fuel Information): Press the fuel information buttonto scroll through the range, fuel used, average fueleconomy and the engine oil life system.

Fuel Range: Press the fuel information button untilRANGE appears on the display. This mode shows theremaining distance you can drive without refueling.It is based on fuel economy and the fuel remaining inthe tank. The display will show LOW if the fuel levelis low.

The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range isan average of recent driving conditions. As yourdriving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.Fuel range cannot be reset.

Fuel Used: Press the fuel information button untilFUEL USED appears on the display. This mode showsthe number of gallons or liters of fuel used since thelast reset of this menu item. To reset the fuel usedinformation, press and hold the select button for onesecond while FUEL USED is displayed.

3-45

Average Fuel Economy: Press the fuel informationbutton until AVG ECON appears on the display.This mode shows how many miles per gallon (MPG) orliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) your vehicle isgetting based on current and past driving conditions.

Press and hold the select button for one second whileAVG ECON is displayed to reset the average fueleconomy. Average fuel economy will then be calculatedstarting from that point. If the average fuel economy is notreset, it will be continually updated each time you drive.

Engine Oil Life System: Press the fuel informationbutton until ENGINE OIL LIFE appears on the display.The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the oil’sremaining useful life. It will show 100% when thesystem is reset after an oil change. It will alert you tochange your oil on a schedule consistent with yourdriving conditions.

Always reset the engine oil life system after an oilchange. To reset the engine oil life system, use the fuelbutton to reach the ENGINE OIL LIFE screen andthen press and hold the select button for five secondswhile ENGINE OIL LIFE is displayed. OIL LIFERESET will appear on the display for 10 seconds to letyou know the system is reset. See Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 5-16 for more information.

In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring theoil life, additional maintenance is recommended inthe Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See EngineOil on page 5-13 and Scheduled Maintenance onpage 6-4.

Customization Button

4 (Customization): Press the customization button toaccess the VEHICLE SETTINGS menu and customizethe settings to your vehicle. See DIC VehicleCustomization on page 3-54 for more information.

Select Button

r (Select): Press the select button to reset certainDIC functions and set your customization settings.For example, this button will reset the trip odometersand scroll through the languages in which you can selectthe DIC to display information.

3-46

DIC Warnings and MessagesWarning messages are displayed on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) to notify the driver that thestatus of the vehicle has changed and that some actionmay be needed by the driver to correct the condition.If there is more than one message that needs tobe displayed they will appear one after another. Somemessages may not require immediate action, butyou should press any of the four DIC buttons located onthe steering wheel or the trip odometer reset stemlocated on the instrument panel cluster to acknowledgethat you received the messages and clear them fromthe display. Some messages cannot be cleared from thedisplay because they are more urgent. These messagesrequire action before they can be removed from theDIC display. You should take any messages that appearon the display seriously and remember that clearingthe messages will only make the messages disappear,not correct the problem. The following are the possiblemessages that can be displayed and some informationabout them.

BATTERY NOT CHARGINGIf the battery is not charging during operation, thismessage will appear on the DIC. Driving with thisproblem could drain your battery. Have the electricalsystem checked as soon as possible by your dealer.See Charging System Light on page 3-31 and VoltmeterGage on page 3-32 for more information. Pressingany of the four DIC buttons or the trip odometer resetstem will clear the message from the DIC display.

CHANGE ENGINE OILThis message is displayed when the engine oil needs tobe changed. See “Engine Oil Life System” under DICOperation and Displays on page 3-44 and EngineOil Life System on page 5-16 for information on how toreset the message. Also, see Engine Oil on page 5-13for more information. This message will clear itself after10 seconds until the next ignition cycle.

3-47

CHARGING SYSTEM FAILUREOn some vehicles, if there is a problem with thegenerator and battery charging system, this messagewill appear on the DIC, a chime will sound and thecharging system light on the instrument panel clusterwill come on. See Charging System Light on page 3-31and Voltmeter Gage on page 3-32 for more information.Driving with this problem could drain your battery.Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Stop and turn offthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Have theelectrical system checked by your dealer immediately.

CHECK OIL LEVELIf the oil level in the vehicle is low, this message willappear on the DIC. Check the oil level and correct it asnecessary. You may need to let the vehicle cool orwarm up and cycle the ignition to be sure this messagewill clear. Once the problem is corrected, pressingany of the four DIC buttons or the trip odometer resetstem will clear this message from the DIC display. Thismessage will clear itself after 10 seconds until thenext ignition cycle.

CHECK WASHER FLUIDIf the washer fluid level is low, this message will appearon the DIC. Adding washer fluid will clear the message.See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-34 for moreinformation. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons or thetrip odometer reset stem will clear it from the DICdisplay. This message will clear itself after 10 secondsuntil the next ignition cycle.

DRIVER DOOR AJARIf the driver’s door is not fully closed and the vehicle is ina drive gear, this message will appear on the display andyou will hear a chime. Stop and turn off the vehicle, checkthe door for obstacles, and close the door again. Check tosee if the message still appears on the DIC. Pressing anyof the four DIC buttons or the trip odometer reset stemwill clear the message from the DIC display.

ENGINE COOLANT HOTIf the cooling system temperature gets hot, this messagewill appear in the DIC. Stop the vehicle and let theengine idle in PARK (P) to allow the coolant to reach asafe temperature. This message will clear when thecoolant temperature drops to a safe operatingtemperature. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons orthe trip odometer reset stem will clear the message fromthe DIC display.

3-48

ENGINE OVERHEATEDIf the engine cooling system reaches unsafetemperatures for operation, this message will appear inthe DIC and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn offthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severedamage. This message will clear when the enginehas cooled to a safe operating temperature.

FUEL LEVEL LOWIf the fuel level is low, this message will appear on theDIC and you will hear a chime. Refuel as soon aspossible. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons or thetrip odometer reset stem will clear the message from theDIC display. It will also clear itself after 10 seconds.The low fuel light near the fuel gage will still remain onin either case. See Low Fuel Warning Light onpage 3-43,Fuel Gage on page 3-42 and Fuel onpage 5-5 for more information.

KEYFOB X BATTERY LOWIf a remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low, thismessage will appear on the DIC. The battery needsto be replaced in the transmitter. See “BatteryReplacement” under Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperation on page 2-5. Pressing any of the fourDIC buttons or the trip odometer reset stem will clearthe message from the DIC display.

LEFT REAR DOOR AJARIf the driver’s side rear door is not fully closed and thevehicle is in a drive gear, this message will appearon the display and you will hear a chime. Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door for obstacles, andclose the door again. Check to see if the message stillappears on the DIC. Pressing any of the four DICbuttons or the trip odometer reset stem will clear themessage from the DIC display.

OIL LIFE RESETThis message will appear on the display for about10 seconds after resetting the change engine oilmessage. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 and “Engine OilLife System” under DIC Operation and Displays onpage 3-44 for more information.

OIL PRESSURE LOWIf low oil pressure levels occur, this message will bedisplayed on the DIC and a chime will sound. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possible and do not operateit until the cause of the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check your oil as soon as possible and haveyour vehicle serviced by your dealer.

3-49

PASSENGER DOOR AJARIf the passenger’s door is not fully closed and thevehicle is in a drive gear, this message will appear onthe display and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn offthe vehicle, check the door for obstacles, and closethe door again. Check to see if the message stillappears on the DIC. Pressing any of the four DICbuttons or the trip odometer reset stem will clear themessage from the DIC display.

REAR ACCESS OPENOn the SUV, if the liftgate is open while the ignition is inRUN, this message will appear on the DIC and youwill hear a chime. Turn off the vehicle and checkthe liftgate. Restart the vehicle and check for themessage on the DIC display. Pressing any of the fourDIC buttons or the trip odometer reset stem will clear themessage from the DIC display.

On the SUT, if the midgate is open or one or both of themidgate latches are not fully closed, this message willappear on the DIC. Turn off the vehicle and checkthat the midgate and the latches are closed. Restart thevehicle and check for the message on the DIC display.Pressing any of the four DIC buttons or the trip odometerreset stem will clear the message from the DICdisplay.

REDUCED ENGINE POWERThis message is displayed when the cooling systemtemperature gets too hot and the engine further entersthe engine coolant protection mode.

See Engine Overheating on page 5-26 for furtherinformation.

You may also see this message when the vehicledetermines a problem with the electronic throttle control.See your dealer for service.

REPLACE LIFTGATE FUSE (SUV)This message will be displayed if the liftgate lockmalfunctions and/or the liftgate fuse blows. For moreinformation on fuses, see Instrument Panel Fuse Blockon page 5-101 and Underhood Fuse Block onpage 5-105.

If the message returns after replacing the fuse, see yourdealer for service.

3-50

RIGHT REAR DOOR AJARIf the passenger’s side rear door is not fully closed andthe vehicle is in a drive gear, this message willappear on the display and you will hear a chime. Stopand turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstacles,and close the door again. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC. Pressing any of the fourDIC buttons or the trip odometer reset stem will clearthe message from the DIC display.

SERVICE 4WD (Four-Wheel-Drive)If a problem occurs with the all-wheel-drive system, thismessage will appear on the DIC. If this messageappears, stop as soon as possible and turn off thevehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the messageon the DIC display. If the message is still displayed,or appears again when you begin driving, there isa problem with the four-wheel-drive system. See yourdealer for service. Pressing any of the four DIC buttonsor the trip odometer reset stem will clear the messagefrom the DIC display.

SERVICE AIR BAGIf there is a problem with the airbag system, thismessage will be displayed on the DIC. Have your dealerinspect the system for problems. Pressing any of thefour DIC buttons or the trip odometer reset stemwill clear the message from the DIC display. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 3-29 and Airbag System onpage 1-58 for more information.

SERVICE AIR SUSPENSIONIf a problem occurs with the suspension system, thismessage will appear on the DIC. If this messageappears, stop as soon as possible and turn off thevehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the messageon the DIC display. If the message is still displayed,or appears again when you begin driving, there isa problem with the air suspension system. See yourdealer for service.

3-51

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEMIf a problem occurs with the brake system, this messagewill appear on the DIC. If this message appears, stopas soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart thevehicle and check for the message on the DIC display.If the message is still displayed, or appears again whenyou begin driving, there is a problem with the brakesystem. See your dealer for service. Pressing any of thefour DIC buttons or the trip odometer reset stem willclear the message from the DIC display.

TIGHTEN FUEL CAPIf the vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly, thismessage may appear along with the check engine lighton the instrument panel cluster. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 3-37. Reinstall the fuel cap, making sureto fully install the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-7.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed. A loose or missingfuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the cap properly installed shouldturn the light and message off.

TRACTION ACTIVEWhen the traction control system has detected that anyof the vehicle’s wheels are slipping, the tractioncontrol system will activate and this message will appearon the DIC. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 4-9 for more information.

TRANS (Transmission) HOT IDLEENGINEIf the transmission fluid gets hot, this message willappear on the DIC along with a continuous chime.Driving with the transmission fluid temperature high cancause damage to the vehicle. Stop the vehicle andlet it idle to allow the transmission to cool. This messagewill clear and the chime will stop when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

3-52

TRANSMISSION HOTIf the transmission fluid temperature becomes high, thismessage will appear on the DIC.

When the transmission enters the protection mode, youmay notice a change in the transmission shiftingpatterns. When the transmission fluid temperaturereturns to normal, the display will turn off and thetransmission shifting patterns will return to normal.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while thetransmission fluid is overheating and thetransmission temperature warning is displayed onthe instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, youcan damage the transmission. This could lead tocostly repairs that would not be covered byyour warranty. Do not drive your vehicle withoverheated transmission fluid or while transmissiontemperature warning is displayed.

The following situations can cause the transmission tooperate at higher temperatures:

• Towing a trailer

• Hot outside air temperatures

• Hauling a large or heavy load

• Low transmission fluid level

• High transmission fluid level

• Restricted air flow to the radiator and the auxiliarytransmission oil cooler, if equipped

A temporary solution to hotter transmission operatingtemperatures may be to let the transmission cool down.If the transmission is operated at higher temperatureson a frequent basis, see Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-4 for the proper transmission maintenanceintervals.

TURN SIGNAL ONIf a turn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km), thismessage will appear on the display and you will hear achime. Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to theoff position. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons or thetrip odometer reset stem will clear the message fromthe DIC display.

3-53

DIC Vehicle CustomizationYour vehicle may have customization capabilities thatallow you to program some features to one personalizedsetting based on your preference. All of thecustomizable options listed may not be available onyour vehicle. Only the options available will be displayedon your Driver Information Center (DIC).

The default settings for the customization features wereset when your vehicle left the factory, but may havebeen changed from their default state since then.

To change feature preferences, make sure the ignitionis on and the vehicle is in PARK (P). Press thecustomization button to scroll through the availablecustomizable options.

After pressing the customization button, VEHICLESETTINGS will momentarily display before going to acustomization option.

Lock DoorsPress the customization button until LOCK DOORSappears in the display. To select your preferencefor automatic locking, press the select button whileLOCK DOORS is displayed on the DIC. Pressing theselect button will scroll through the following choices:

LOCK DOORS: IN GEAR (default): The doors will lockwhen the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).

LOCK DOORS: WITH SPEED: The doors will lockwhen the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) forthree seconds.

Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on the DIC toselect it and move on to the next feature.

Unlock DoorsPress the customization button until UNLOCK DOORSappears in the display. To select your preference forautomatic unlocking, press the select button whileUNLOCK DOORS is displayed on the DIC. Pressing theselect button will scroll through the following choices:

UNLOCK DOORS: IN PARK (default): All of the doorswill unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

UNLOCK DRIVER: IN PARK: The driver’s door will beunlocked when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

UNLOCK DOORS: KEY OUT: All of the doorswill unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.

UNLOCK DOORS: MANUALLY: The doors will not beunlocked automatically.


3-54

Door Lock DelayIf your DIC does not have this feature, you can stillprogram the delayed locking feature. See DelayedLocking on page 2-9 for more information.When locking the doors with the power lock switch orthe remote keyless entry transmitter and a door orthe liftgate is open, the delayed locking feature will delaylocking the doors and liftgate until five seconds afterthe last door is closed.

Press the customization button until DOOR LOCKDELAY appears in the display. To select your preferencefor delayed locking, press the select button while DOORLOCK DELAY is displayed on the DIC. Pressing theselect button will scroll through the following choices:

DOOR LOCK DELAY: OFF (default): The doors willlock immediately when pressing the power lock switch orthe lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.

DOOR LOCK DELAY: ON: The doors will not lock untilfive seconds after the last door or the liftgate is closed.You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayedlocking feature is in use. You can temporarily overridedelayed locking by pressing the lock button on the door orthe remote keyless entry transmitter a second time.


This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.

Lock FeedbackPress the customization button until LOCK FEEDBACKappears in the display. To select your preference forthe feedback you receive when locking the vehicle withthe remote keyless entry transmitter, press the selectbutton while LOCK FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC.Pressing the select button will scroll through thefollowing choices:

LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH (default): The parkinglamps will flash each time you press the button with thelock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitterand the horn will chirp the second time you press thelock button.

LOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS: The parking lamps willflash each time you press the button with the locksymbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.

LOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp thesecond time you press the button with the lock symbolon the remote keyless entry transmitter.

LOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedbackwhen locking the vehicle.


3-55

Unlock FeedbackPress the customization button until UNLOCKFEEDBACK appears in the display. To select yourpreference for the feedback you will receive whenunlocking the vehicle with the remote keyless entrytransmitter, press the select button while UNLOCKFEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the selectbutton will scroll through the following choices:

UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS (default): The parkinglamps will flash each time you press the button withthe unlock symbol on the remote keyless entrytransmitter.

UNLOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp thesecond time you press the button with the unlocksymbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.

UNLOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH: The parking lamps willflash each time you press the button with the unlocksymbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter and thehorn will chirp the second time you press the unlockbutton.

UNLOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedbackwhen unlocking the vehicle.


Headlamp DelayPress the customization button until HEADLAMPDELAY appears in the display. To select yourpreference for how long the headlamps will stay onwhen you turn off the vehicle, press the select buttonwhile HEADLAMP DELAY is displayed on the DIC.Pressing the select button will scroll through thefollowing choices:

• HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC (Seconds) (default)

• HEADLAMP DELAY: 20 SEC

• HEADLAMP DELAY: 40 SEC

• HEADLAMP DELAY: 1 MIN (Minute)

• HEADLAMP DELAY: 2 MIN

• HEADLAMP DELAY: 3 MIN

• HEADLAMP DELAY: OFF

The amount of time you choose will be the amount oftime that the headlamps stay on after you turn offthe vehicle. If you choose off, the headlamps will turnoff as soon as you turn off the vehicle.


3-56

Perimeter LightsPress the customization button until PERIMETERLIGHTS appears in the display. To select yourpreference for perimeter lighting, press the select buttonwhile PERIMETER LIGHTS is displayed on the DIC.Pressing the select button will scroll through thefollowing choices:

PERIMETER LIGHTS: ON (default): The headlampsand back-up lamps will come on for 40 seconds, ifit is dark enough outside, when you unlock the vehiclewith the remote keyless entry transmitter.

PERIMETER LIGHTS: OFF: The perimeter lights willnot come on when you unlock the vehicle with theremote keyless entry transmitter.


Easy Exit SeatPress the customization button until EASY EXIT SEATappears in the display. To select your preference forseat position exit, press the select button whileEASY EXIT SEAT is displayed on the DIC. Pressing theselect button will scroll through the following choices:

EASY EXIT SEAT: OFF (default): No seat exitrecall will occur.

EASY EXIT SEAT: ON: The driver’s seat will move tothe exit position when the key is removed from theignition.

Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on the DIC toselect it and move on to the next feature. For moreinformation on seat position exit, see Memory Seat onpage 2-61.

3-57

Curb ViewPress the customization button until CURB VIEWappears in the display. To select your preference forcurb view, press the select button while CURB VIEW isdisplayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button willscroll through the following choices:

CURB VIEW: OFF (default): Neither outside mirror willbe tilted down when the vehicle is shifted intoREVERSE (R).

CURB VIEW: PASSENGER: The passenger’s outsidemirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shiftedinto REVERSE (R).

CURB VIEW: DRIVER: The driver’s outside mirror willbe tilted down when the vehicle is shifted intoREVERSE (R).

CURB VIEW: BOTH: The driver’s and passenger’soutside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle isshifted into REVERSE (R).

Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on the DIC toselect it and move on to the next feature. For moreinformation on tilt mirror in reverse, see OutsideAutomatic Dimming Mirror with Curb View Assist onpage 2-44.

Alarm WarningPress the customization button until ALARM WARNINGappears in the display. To select your preference foralarm warning, press the select button while ALARMWARNING is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the selectbutton will scroll through the following choices:

ALARM WARNING: BOTH (default): The headlampswill flash and the horn will chirp when the alarm isactive.

ALARM WARNING: OFF: There will be no alarmwarning on activation.

ALARM WARNING: HORN: The horn will chirp whenthe alarm is active.

ALARM WARNING: LAMPS: The headlamps will flashwhen the alarm is active.

Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while your choice is displayed onthe DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.For more information on alarm warning type, seeContent Theft-Deterrent on page 2-21.

3-58

LanguageTo select your preference for display language, pressthe select button while LANGUAGE is displayed on theDIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through thefollowing languages:

• ENGLISH

• FRANCAIS (French)

• ESPANOL (Spanish)

Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on the DIC toselect it.

If you accidentally choose a language that you do notwant or understand, press and hold the customizationbutton and the trip information button at the sametime. The DIC will begin scrolling through the languagesin their particular language. English will be in English,Francais will be in French, and Espanol will be inSpanish. When you see the language that you wouldlike, release both buttons. The DIC will then display theinformation in the language you chose.

You can also scroll through the different languages bypressing and holding the trip reset stem for fourseconds, as long as you are in the odometer mode.

Display UnitsPress the customization button until DISPLAY UNITSappears in the display. To select English or metric, pressthe select button while DISPLAY UNITS is displayedon the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll throughthe following choices:

• DISPLAY UNITS: ENGLISH

• DISPLAY UNITS: METRIC

If you choose English, all information will be displayedin English units. For example, distance in miles and fueleconomy in miles per gallon. If you choose metric, allinformation will be displayed in metric units. Forexample, distance in kilometers and fuel economy inliters per 100 kilometers.

Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on the DIC toselect it and end out of the customizable options.

3-59

Audio System(s)Notice: Before adding any sound equipment toyour vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, makesure that it can be added by checking with yourdealer. Also, check federal rules covering mobileradio and telephone units. If sound equipment canbe added, it is very important to do it properly.Added sound equipment may interfere withthe operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, orother systems, and even damage them. Yourvehicle’s systems may interfere with the operationof sound equipment that has been added.

Notice: The chime signals related to seat belts,parking brake, and other functions of your vehicleoperate through the GM radio/entertainment system.If that equipment is replaced or additionalequipment is added to your vehicle, the chimes maynot work. Make sure that replacement or additionalequipment is compatible with your vehicle beforeinstalling it.

Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, findout what your audio system can do, and how to operateall of its controls.

Your vehicle has a feature called Retained AccessoryPower (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can beplayed even after the ignition is turned off. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) on page 2-25 for moreinformation.

Setting the TimeThe radio may have a button marked with an H or HRto represent hours and an M or MN to representminutes.

Press and hold the hour button until the correct hourappears on the display. Press and hold the minutebutton until the correct minute appears on the display.The time can be set with the ignition on or off.

To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcastingRadio Data System (RDS) information, press andhold the hour and minute buttons at the same time untilRDS TIME appears on the display. To accept thistime, press and hold the hour and minute buttons, at thesame time, for another two seconds. If the time is notavailable from the station, NO UPDAT will appear on thedisplay.

RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to anRDS broadcast station, it may take a few minutes forthe time to update.

3-60

Radio with Cassette and CD

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).RDS features are available for use only on FM stationsthat broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type ofprogramming

• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

This system relies upon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and will only work when theinformation is available. In rare cases, a radio stationmay broadcast incorrect information that will causethe radio features to work improperly. If this happens,contact the radio station.

While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the stationname or call letters will appear on the display instead ofthe frequency. RDS stations may also provide thetime of day, a program type (PTY) for currentprogramming, and the name of the program beingbroadcast.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the48 contiguous Untied States. XM™ offers 100 coast tocoast channels including music, news, sports, talk, andchildren’s programming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song title andartist name. A service fee is required in order to receivethe XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™ atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

3-61

Playing the Radio

PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system onand off.

o VOL p (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or todecrease the volume.

INFO (Information): Press this knob to switch thedisplay between the radio station frequency andthe time. When the ignition is off, press this knob todisplay the time.

For RDS, press the INFO knob to change what appearson the display while using RDS. The display optionsare station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and thename of the program (if available).

For XM™ (if equipped), press the INFO knob while inXM™ mode to retrieve four different categories ofinformation related to the current song or channel: Artist,Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel Number/ChannelName.

To change the default on the display, press the INFOknob until you see the display you want, then holdthe knob until you hear a beep. The selected display willnow be the default.

AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automaticvolume, the audio system will adjust automatically tomake up for road and wind noise as you drive byincreasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button toselect LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appearon the display. Each higher setting will provide morevolume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. To turnautomatic volume off, press this button until AVOLOFF appears on the display.

Finding a StationBAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display willshow the selection.

TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK ¨: Press either the SEEK or the TYPEarrows to go to the next or to the previous station andstay there.

The radio will only seek stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or theTYPE arrows for two seconds until SCAN appearson the display and you hear a beep. The radio will go toa station, play for a few seconds, then go on to thenext station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrowsagain to stop scanning.

3-62

To scan preset stations, press and hold either theSCAN or the TYPE arrows for more than four seconds.PSCN will appear on the display and you will hear adouble beep. The radio will go to a preset station, playfor a few seconds, then go on to the next presetstation. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrowsagain to stop scanning presets.

The radio will only scan stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped), can be programedon the six numbered pushbuttons, by performingthe following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1or XM2.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever thatnumbered pushbutton is pressed, the stationthat was set will return for that pushbutton.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

To store an equalization setting to a preset stationperform the following:

1. Tune to the preset station.

2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to selectthe equalization setting.Once the equalization no longer appears on thedisplay, the equalization will be set for that presetstation.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASSor TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob toincrease or to decrease. The display will show the bassor treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, decreasethe treble.

To adjust the bass and treble to the middle position,push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produceone beep and adjust the display level to the middleposition.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middleposition, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no toneor speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED willappear on the display, you will hear a beep, andthe display level will be adjusted to the middle position.

3-63

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this buttonto select customized equalization settings designedfor country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.

The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings foreach preset and source.

If the radio is equipped with the Bose audio system, theequalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the rightand the left speakers, push and release the AUDIOknob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob tomove the sound toward the right or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADEappears on the display. Turn the knob to move thesound toward the front or the rear speakers.

To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,push the AUDIO knob, then push it again and holdit until the radio produces one beep. The balance andfade will be adjusted to the middle position and thedisplay will show the speaker balance.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middleposition, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no toneor speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED willappear on the display, you will hear a beep, andthe display level will be adjusted to the middle position.

Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station(RDS and XM™)To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:

1. Press the TYPE button to activate program typeselect mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on thedisplay.

2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release theTYPE button to select a PTY.

3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press andrelease either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows toselect and to take you to the PTY’s first station.

4. To go to another station within that PTY and thePTY is displayed, press either the TYPE or theSEEK arrows once. If the PTY is not displayed, goback to Step 1.

5. Press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to exitprogram type select mode.

If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONEwill appear on the display and the radio will return tothe last station you were listening to.

3-64

SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performingthe following:

1. Press the TYPE button to activate program typeselect mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY willappear on the display.


3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and holdeither the TYPE or the SCAN arrows for twoseconds, and the radio will begin scanning thestations in the PTY.

4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to stopat a station.

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequencyallows the radio to switch to a stronger station with thesame program type. To turn alternate frequency on,press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON willappear on the display. The radio may switch to stationswith a stronger frequency.

To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BANDagain for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on thedisplay. The radio will not switch to other stations.

This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite RadioService.

Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)These buttons have factory PTY presets. Up to 12 PTYs(six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed on thesix numbered pushbuttons, by performing thefollowing steps:

1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.

2. Press the TYPE button to activate program typeselect mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY willappear on the display.


4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever thatnumbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTY thatwas set will return.


3-65

RDS Messages

INFO (Information): If the current station has amessage, the information symbol will appear on thedisplay. Press this button to see the message. Themessage may display the artist, song title, call in phonenumbers, etc.

If the entire message is not displayed, parts of themessage will appear every three seconds. To scrollthrough the message, press and release the INFObutton. A new group of words will appear on the displayafter every press of the button. Once the completemessage has been displayed, the information symbolwill disappear from the display until another newmessage is received. The last message can bedisplayed by pressing the INFO button. You can viewthe last message until a new message is receivedor a different station is tuned to.

When a message is not available from a station, NOINFO will appear on the display.

Radio Messages

CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system hasbeen calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCAL ERR appears on the display, it means that the radiohas not been configured properly for the vehicle andmust be returned to your GM dealer for service.

LOCKED: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicleto your GM dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your GM dealer.

3-66

XM™ Radio MessagesRadio Display

Message Condition Action Required

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating Updatingencryption code

The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM signal. When you moveinto an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after 4 second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

CH Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.

CH Unavail Channel no longeravailable

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Info Artist Name/Feature notavailable

No artist information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info Song/Program Title notavailable

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

3-67

XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)Radio Display


No Info Category Name notavailable

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at thistime on this channel. The system is working properly.

Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Locked Theft lock active The XM receiver in the vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message isreceived after having your vehicle serviced, check withyour GM dealer.

Radio ID Radio ID label(channel 0)

If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with theXM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed toactivate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, theremay be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.

Chk XMRcvr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GMdealer.

3-68

Playing a Cassette TapeThe tape player is built to work best with tapes that areup to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapeslonger than that are so thin they may not work well inthis player. The longer side with the tape visible shouldface to the right. If you hear nothing or hear a garbledsound, the tape may not be in squarely. Press the ejectbutton to remove the tape and start over.

If the ignition and radio are off, press the eject button orthe INFO knob to insert and to begin play of a tape.If the ignition is on and the radio is off, the tape can beinserted and will begin playing.

While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUDIO, andSEEK controls just as you do for the radio. The cassettetape symbol will appear on the display and an arrowshowing which side of the tape is playing. The tapeplayer will play the other side of the tape when itreaches the end.

Cassette tape adapter kits for portable CD players willwork in the cassette tape player. See “CD Adapter Kits”later for more information.

The tape bias is set automatically when a metal orchrome tape is inserted.

If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette TapeMessages” later in this section.

1 PREV (Previous): The tape must have at least threeseconds of silence between each selection forprevious to work. Press this pushbutton to go to theprevious selection on the tape if the current selectionhas been playing for less than three seconds. If pressedwhen the current selection has been playing fromthree to 13 seconds, it will go to the beginning of theprevious selection or the beginning of the currentselection, depending on the position on the tape. Ifpressed when the current selection has been playing formore than 13 seconds, it will go to the beginning ofthe current selection.

SEEK and a negative number will appear on the displaywhile the cassette player is in the previous mode.Pressing this pushbutton multiple times will increase thenumber of selections to be searched back, up to -9.

2 NEXT: The tape must have at least three seconds ofsilence between each selection for next to work.Press this pushbutton to go to the next selection on thetape. Pressing this pushbutton multiple times, in nextmode, will increase the number of selections to besearched forward. SEEK and a positive numberwill appear on the display.

3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to quicklyreverse the tape. The radio will play while the tapereverses. Press it again to return to playing speed. Thestation frequency and REV will appear on the display.Select stations during reverse operation by using TUNEand SEEK.

3-69

4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to quicklyadvance the tape. The radio will play while thetape advances. Press this pushbutton again to return toplaying speed. The station frequency and FWD willappear on the display. Select stations during forwardoperation by using TUNE and SEEK.

5 SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side ofthe tape.

© SEEK ¨: The right arrow is the same as theNEXT pushbutton, and the left arrow is the same as thePREV pushbutton. If either arrow is held or pressedmore than once, the player will continue moving forwardor backward through the tape. SEEK and a positiveor negative number will appear on the display.

© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or theTYPE arrows for more than two seconds until SCANappears on the display and you hear a beep. The radiowill go to the next selection, play for 10 seconds,then go on to the next selection. Press either the SCANor the TYPE arrows again, to stop scanning. Thetape must have at least three seconds of silencebetween each selection for scan to work.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when acassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or CDwill remain safely inside the radio for future listening.

TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a cassette tape orCD when listening to the radio. The inactive tape or CDwill remain safely inside the radio for future listening.

Z (Eject): Press this button to stop a tape when it isplaying or to eject a tape when it is not playing. Eject maybe activated with the radio off. Cassette tapes may beloaded with the radio off if this button is pressed first.

Cassette Tape Messages

CHK TAPE (Check Tape): If this message appears onthe display, the tape will not play due to one of thefollowing errors:

• The tape is tight and the player cannot turn thetape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape withthe open end down and try to turn the righthub counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tapeover and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily,the tape may be damaged and should not be usedin the player. Try a new tape to make sure yourplayer is working properly.

• The tape is broken. Try a new tape.

• The tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attemptto get the cassette out. Try a new tape.

3-70

CLEAN: If this message appears on the display, thecassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still playtapes, but it should be cleaned as soon as possible toprevent damage to the tapes and player. See Careof the Cassette Tape Player on page 3-91.

If the cassette tape is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good cassette.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displaysan error message, write it down and provide it toyour GM dealer when reporting the problem.

CD Adapter KitsIt is possible to use a portable CD player with thecassette tape player after activating the bypass featureon your tape player.To activate the bypass feature, perform the followingsteps:

1. Turn the ignition on.2. Turn the radio off.3. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for five

seconds. READY will appear on the display andthe tape symbol on the display will flash, indicatingthe feature is active.

4. Insert the adapter into the cassette tape slot. It willpower up the radio and begin playing.

The override feature will remain active until the ejectbutton is pressed.

Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. Ifyou want to insert a CD with the ignition off, firstpress the eject button or the INFO knob.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with the CD in theplayer, it will stay in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear onthe display. As each new track starts to play, thetrack number will appear on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) singleCDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the qualityof the music that has been recorded, and the way theCD-R has been handled. There may be an increasein skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty inloading and ejecting. If these problems occur try aknown good CD.

Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caughtin the CD player.

If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”later in this section.

3-71

1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to thebeginning of the current track if more than eightseconds have played. TRACK and the track number willappear on the display. If this pushbutton is held orpressed more than once, the player will continue movingbackward through the CD.

2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.TRACK and the track number will appear on thedisplay. If this pushbutton is held or pressed more thanonce, the player will continue moving forward throughthe CD.

3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton toquickly reverse within a track. Press and hold thispushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at sixtimes the normal playing speed. Press and hold itfor more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times thenormal playing speed. Release this pushbutton toplay the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the trackwill appear on the display.

4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton toquickly advance within a track. Press and hold thispushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at sixtimes the normal playing speed. Press and hold it formore than two seconds to advance at 17 times thenormal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to playthe passage. ET and the elapsed time of the trackwill appear on the display.

6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear thetracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ONwill appear on the display. RDM T and the tracknumber will appear on the display when each trackstarts to play. Press this pushbutton again to turnoff random play. RDM OFF will appear on the display.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the startof the current or to the previous track. Press theright arrow to go to the start of the next track. If eitherarrow is held or pressed more than once, the player willcontinue moving backward or forward through the CD.

© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN orthe TYPE arrows for more than two seconds until SCANappears on the display and you hear a beep. Theradio will go to the next track, play for 10 seconds, thengo on to the next track. Press either the SCAN or theTYPE arrows again, to stop scanning.

3-72

INFO (Information): Press this knob to see how longthe current track has been playing. ET and the elapsedtime will appear on the display. To change the defaulton the display, track or elapsed time, press theknob until you see the display you want, then hold theknob for two seconds. The radio will produce onebeep and the selected display will now be the default.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio whena cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape orCD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.

TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a cassettetape or CD when listening to the radio. The inactivetape or CD will remain safely inside the radio for futurelistening.

Z (Eject): Press this button to stop a CD when it isplaying or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Ejectmay be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDsmay be loaded with the radio and ignition off if thisbutton is pressed first.

CD MessagesIf the CD comes out, it could be for one of the followingreasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour andtry again.

• There may have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,try a known good CD.


3-73

Radio with Six-Disc CD

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).RDS features are available for use only on FM stationsthat broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type ofprogramming

• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

This system relies upon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and will only work when theinformation is available. In rare cases, a radio stationmay broadcast incorrect information that will causethe radio features to work improperly. If this happens,contact the radio station.

While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the stationname or call letters will appear on the display instead ofthe frequency. RDS stations may also provide thetime of day, a program type (PTY) for currentprogramming, and the name of the program beingbroadcast.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the48 contiguous Untied States. XM™ offers 100 coast tocoast channels including music, news, sports, talk, andchildren’s programming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song title andartist name. A service fee is required in order to receivethe XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™ atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

3-74

Playing the Radio

PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system onand off.

VOLUME: Turn this knob to increase or to decreasethe volume.

INFO (Information): Press this knob to switch thedisplay between the radio station frequency andthe time. When the ignition is off, press this knob todisplay the time.

For RDS, press the INFO knob to change what appearson the display while using RDS. The display optionsare station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and thename of the program (if available).

For XM™ (if equipped), press the INFO knob while inXM™ mode to retrieve four different categories ofinformation related to the current song or channel:Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, ChannelNumber/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, press the INFOknob until you see the display you want, then holdthe knob until you hear a beep. The selected display willnow be the default.

AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automaticvolume, the audio system will adjust automatically tomake up for road and wind noise as you drive byincreasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button toselect LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appearon the display. Each higher setting will provide morevolume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. To turnautomatic volume off, press this button until AVOLOFF appears on the display.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display willshow the selection.

TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK ¨: Press either the SEEK or the TYPEarrows to go to the next or to the previous station andstay there.

The radio will only seek stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

3-75

© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or theTYPE arrows for two seconds until SC appears onthe display and you hear a beep. The radio will go to astation, play for a few seconds, then go on to thenext station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrowsagain to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold either theSCAN or the TYPE arrows for more than four seconds.PRESET SCAN will appear on the display and youwill hear a double beep. The radio will go to a presetstation, play for a few seconds, then go on to thenext preset station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPEarrows again to stop scanning presets.

The radio will only scan stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped), can be programedon the six numbered pushbuttons, by performingthe following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1or XM2.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever thatnumbered pushbutton is pressed, the stationthat was set will return for that pushbutton.


To store an equalization setting to a preset stationperform the following:

1. Tune to the preset station.

2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to selectthe equalization setting.Once the equalization no longer appears on thedisplay, the equalization will be set for that presetstation.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS,MID, or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knobto increase or to decrease. The display will showthe bass, midrange, or treble level. If a station is weakor noisy, decrease the treble.

To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble to the middleposition, push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radiowill produce one beep and adjust the display level to themiddle position.

3-76

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middleposition, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no toneor speaker controls are displayed. CENTERED willappear on the display and you will hear a beep.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this buttonto select customized equalization settings designedfor country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.

The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings foreach preset and source.

If the radio is equipped with the Bose audio system, theequalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the rightand the left speakers, push and release the AUDIOknob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob tomove the sound toward the right or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers,push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appearson the display. Turn the knob to move the sound towardthe front or the rear speakers.

To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produceone beep and adjust the display level to the middleposition.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middleposition, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no toneor speaker controls are displayed. CENTERED willappear on the display and you will hear a beep.

Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station(RDS and XM™)To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:

1. Press the TYPE button to activate program typeselect mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTYwill appear on the display.


3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either theTYPE or the SEEK arrows to select and to take youto the PTY’s first station.

4. To go to another station within that PTY and thePTY is displayed, press either the TYPE or theSEEK arrows once. If the PTY is not displayed, goback to Step 1.

5. Press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to exitprogram type select mode.

3-77

To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and hold theTYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY you wantto interrupt with. When selected, an asterisk willappear beside that PTY on the display. Select multipleinterrupts if desired. When listening to a CD, thelast selected RDS station will interrupt play if thatselected program type format is broadcast.

SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performingthe following:



3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and holdeither the TYPE or the SCAN arrows for twoseconds, and the radio will begin scanning thestations in the PTY.

4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to stopat a station.

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequencyallows the radio to switch to a stronger station with thesame program type. To turn alternate frequency on,press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON willappear on the display. The radio may switch to stationswith a stronger frequency.

To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BANDagain for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on thedisplay. The radio will not switch to other stations.

This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite RadioService.

Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets. Up to12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed onthe six numbered pushbuttons, by performing thefollowing steps:

1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.



4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever thatnumbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTY thatwas set will return.


3-78

RDS Messages

INFO (Information): If the current station has amessage, INFO will appear on the display. Press thisbutton to see the message. The message may displaythe artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.

If the entire message is not displayed, parts of themessage will appear every three seconds. To scrollthrough the message, press and release the INFObutton. A new group of words will appear on the displayafter every press of this button. Once the completemessage has been displayed, INFO will disappear fromthe display until another new message is received.The last message can be displayed by pressingthe INFO button. You can view the last message until anew message is received or a different station istuned to.

Radio Messages

CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system hasbeen calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCAL ERR appears on the display, it means that the radiohas not been configured properly for the vehicle andmust be returned to your GM dealer for service.

LOCKED: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicleto your GM dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your GM dealer.

3-79

XM™ Radio MessagesRadio Display


XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating Updatingencryption code

The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM signal. When you moveinto an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after 4 second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

CH Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.

CH Unavail Channel no longeravailable

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Info Artist Name/Feature notavailable

No artist information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info Song/Program Title notavailable

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

3-80

XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)Radio Display


No Info Category Name notavailable

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at thistime on this channel. The system is working properly.

Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Locked Theft lock active The XM receiver in the vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message isreceived after having your vehicle serviced, check withyour GM dealer.

Radio ID Radio ID label(channel 0)

If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with theXM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed toactivate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, theremay be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.

Chk XMRcvr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GMdealer.

3-81

Playing a CDIf the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in theplayer, it will stay in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear onthe CD. As each new track starts to play, the tracknumber will appear on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) singleCDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the qualityof the music that has been recorded, and the way theCD-R has been handled. There may be an increasein skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty inloading and ejecting. If these problems occur try aknown good CD.

Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caughtin the CD player.


LOAD: Press this button to load CDs into the CDplayer. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and release the LOAD button.

3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the right of theslot, to turn green.

4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player will pull the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:


2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.You will hear a beep and the indicator light, locatedto the right of the slot, will begin to flash andMULTI LOAD # will appear on the display.

3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,INSERT CD # will appear on the display, loada CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, label sideup. The player will pull the CD in.Once the CD is loaded, the indicator light will beginflashing again. Once the light stops flashing andturns green, you can load another CD. TheCD player takes up to six CDs. Do not try to loadmore than six.

3-82

To load more than one CD but less than six, completeSteps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs,press the LOAD button to cancel the loading function.The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.

If more than one CD has been loaded, a number foreach CD will appear on the display.

Playing a Specific Loaded CDFor every CD loaded, a number will appear on thedisplay. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUXbutton, then press the numbered pushbutton thatcorresponds to the CD. A small bar will appear underthe CD number that is playing and the track number willappear on the display.


CDZ (Eject): Press this button to eject CD(s).

To eject the CD that is currently playing, press andrelease this button.

To eject multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Press and hold the CD eject button for five seconds.You will hear a beep and the indicator light, locatedto the right of the slot, will begin to flash andEJECT ALL will appear on the display.

2. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,REMOVE CD # will appear on the display. TheCD will eject and can be removed.Once the CD is removed, the indicator light willbegin flashing again and another CD will eject.To stop ejecting the CDs, press the LOAD or theeject button.

If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the CD willbe automatically pulled back into the player. If CD ispushed back into the player, before the 25 second timeperiod is complete, the player will sense an errorand will try to eject the CD several times beforestopping.

Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject aCD after you have tried to push it in manually. Theplayer’s 25-second eject timer will reset at each press ofeject, causing the player to not eject the CD until the25-second time period has elapsed.

3-83

{ REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button toreverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at areduced volume. Release the button to play thepassage. The elapsed time of the track will appear onthe display.

FWD | (Forward): Press and hold this button toadvance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at areduced volume. Release the button to play thepassage. The elapsed time of the track will appear onthe display.

RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entire CDcan be repeated.

To use repeat, do the following:

• To repeat the track you are listening to, press andrelease the RPT button. RPT will appear on thedisplay. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.

• To repeat the CD you are listening to, press andhold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT willappear on the display. Press RPT again to turn offrepeat play.

RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to thetracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on oneCD or on all of the CDs. To use random, do one ofthe following:

• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to inrandom order, press and release the RDM button.RANDOM ONE will appear on the display. PressRDM again to turn off random play.

• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loadedin random order, press and hold RDM for morethan two seconds. You will hear a beep andRANDOM ALL will appear on the display. PressRDM again to turn off random play.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQto select the equalization setting while playing a CD.The equalization will be stored whenever a CD is played.For more information on AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ”listed previously in this section.

©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of thecurrent track, if more than ten seconds have played.Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If eitherarrow is held or pressed more than once, the player willcontinue moving backward or forward through the CD.

3-84

©SCAN ¨: To scan one CD, press and hold eitherSCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCANappears on the display and you hear a beep. The radiowill go to the next track, play for 10 seconds, then goon to the next track. Press either SCAN arrow again, tostop scanning.

To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either SCANarrow for more than four seconds until CD SCANappears on the display and you hear a beep. Use thisfeature to listen to 10 seconds of the first track ofeach loaded CD. Press either SCAN arrow again, tostop scanning.

INFO (Information): Press this knob to see how longthe current track has been playing. To change thedefault on the display, track or elapsed time, press theknob until you see the display you want, then holdthe knob until the display flashes. The selected displaywill now be the default.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when aCD is playing. The inactive CD(s) will remain safelyinside the radio for future listening.

Using Song List ModeThe six-disc CD changer has a feature called song list.This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.

To save tracks into the song list feature, performthe following steps:

1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least oneCD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this sectionfor more information.

2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song listmode. S-LIST should not appear on the display. IfS-LIST is present, press the SONG LIST buttonto turn it off.

3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numberedpushbutton and then use the SEEK or TYPE rightarrow to locate the track to be saved. The track willbegin to play.

4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button to save thetrack into memory. When SONG LIST is pressed,one beep will be heard immediately. After twoseconds of continuously pressing the SONG LISTbutton, two beeps will sound to confirm thetrack has been saved.

5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.

3-85

S-LIST FULL will appear on the display if you try tosave more than 20 selections.

To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button.One beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on thedisplay. The recorded tracks will begin to play inthe order they were saved.

Seek through the song list by using the SEEK or TYPEarrows. Seeking past the last saved track will returnto the first saved track.

To delete tracks from the song list, perform the followingsteps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.S-LIST will appear on the display.

3. Press either SEEK or TYPE arrow to select thedesired track to be deleted.

4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for twoseconds. When SONG LIST is pressed, onebeep will be heard immediately. After two secondsof continuously pressing the SONG LIST button,two beeps will be heard to confirm that the track hasbeen deleted.

After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks aremoved up the list. When another track is added to thesong list, the track will be added to the end of the list.

To delete the entire song list, perform the followingsteps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.S-LIST will appear on the display.

3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for morethan four seconds. One beep will be heard,followed by two beeps after two seconds, and afinal beep will be heard after four seconds. S-LISTEMPTY will appear on the display indicating thesong list has been deleted.

If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains savedtracks from that CD, those tracks are automaticallydeleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the songlist again are added to the bottom of the list.

To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button.One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed fromthe display.

3-86

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message appears on the displayand/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour andtry again.

• There may have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,try a known good CD.


Navigation/Radio SystemYour vehicle may have a navigation radio system thatincludes Radio Data System (RDS) information andXM™ Satellite Radio Service capabilities (if equipped).For information on how to use this system, see the“Navigation System” manual.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to anyof the sources: radio, cassette tapes, or CDs. However,the rear seat passengers can only control the sourcesthat the front seat passengers are not listening to.For example, rear seat passengers may listen to andcontrol cassette tapes or CDs through the headphoneswhile the driver listens to the radio through the frontspeakers. The rear seat passengers have control of thevolume for each set of headphones.

The front seat audio controls always have priority overthe RSA controls. If the front seat passengers switch thesource for the main radio to a remote source, the RSA willnot be able to control the source. You can operate therear seat audio when the main radio is off.

3-87

P (Power): Press this button to turn the system on oroff. The rear speakers will be muted when the poweris turned on unless your vehicle is equipped withthe Bose® audio system.

u (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or todecrease the volume. The left knob controls the leftheadphones and the right knob controls the rightheadphones.

SRC (Source): Press this button to select a source:radio, cassette tape, or CD.

x SEEK w: When listening to FM1, FM2, AM, orXM1 or XM2 (if equipped), press the up or thedown arrow to go to the next or to the previous stationand stay there. This function is inactive if the frontseat passengers are listening to the radio.

When a cassette tape is playing, press the up or thedown arrow to go to the next or the previous selection.This function is inactive if the front seat passengersare listening to a cassette tape.

When a CD is playing, press the up arrow to got to thenext track on the CD. Press the down arrow to go tothe start of the current track if more than eight secondshave played. This function is inactive if the front seatpassengers are listening to a CD.

PROG (Program): Press this button to go to the nextpreset radio station set on the pushbuttons on themain radio. This function is inactive if the front seatpassengers are listening to the radio.

When a cassette tape is playing, press this button to go tothe other side of the tape. This function is inactive if thefront seat passengers are listening to a cassette tape.

3-88

When a CD is playing, press this button to go to thebeginning of the CD. This function is inactive if the frontseat passengers are listening to a CD.

When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer, pressthis button to select the next CD, if multiple CDs areloaded. This function is inactive if the front seatpassengers are listening to a CD.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of yourvehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically bylearning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, itwill not operate and LOCKED will appear on the display.

When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinkingred light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operateif stolen.

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

If your vehicle has this feature, some audio controls canbe adjusted at the steering wheel. They include thefollowing:

g (OnStar/Mute): Press this button to interact withthe OnStar® system. See the OnStar® manual providedwith your vehicle for more information.

3-89

PROG (Program): Press this button to play the stationsthat are programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons.The radio will go to the first preset station, play for a fewseconds, then go to the next preset station. Press thisbutton again to stop scanning. The radio will onlyscan preset stations with a strong signal that are in theselected band.

When a cassette tape is playing, press this button toplay the other side of the tape.

When a CD is playing in the CD changer, press thisbutton to go to the next available CD, if multiple CDs areloaded.

Q SOURCE R: Press this button to switch betweenFM1, FM2, AM, or XM1, or XM2 (if equipped), or acassette tape or CD. The cassette or CD must be loadedto play. Available loaded sources are shown on thedisplay as a tape or a CD symbol.

Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to go tothe next or to the previous radio station and staythere. The radio will only seek stations with a strongsignal that are in the selected band.

When a cassette tape or CD is playing, press the up orthe down arrow to fast forward or reverse.

Q VOLR (Volume): Press the up or the down arrowto increase or to decrease the volume.

Radio Reception

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,especially at night. The longer range, however, cancause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pickup noise from things like storms and power lines. Tryreducing the treble to reduce this noise.

FMFM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signalswill reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to come and go.

3-90

Care of the Cassette Tape PlayerA tape player that is not cleaned regularly can causereduced sound quality, ruined cassettes, or a damagedmechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in theircases away from contaminants, direct sunlight, andextreme heat. If they are not, they may not operateproperly or may cause failure of the tape player.

The tape player should be cleaned regularly after every50 hours of use. The radio may display CLEAN toindicate that the tape player has been used for 50 hourswithout resetting the tape clean timer. If this messageappears on the display, the cassette tape playerneeds to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but it shouldbe cleaned as soon as possible to prevent damageto the tapes and player. If there is a reduction in soundquality, try a known good cassette to see if the tapeor the tape player is at fault. If this other cassette has noimprovement in sound quality, clean the tape player.

For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasivecleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tapehead as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. Therecommended cleaning cassette is available throughyour dealer.

When cleaning the cassette tape player with therecommended non-abrasive cleaning cassette, it ispossible that the cassette may eject, because the cuttape detection feature on the radio may recognize it as abroken tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning cassettefrom being ejected, use the following steps:


2. Turn the radio off.

3. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for fiveseconds. READY will appear on the display andthe cassette symbol will flash for five seconds.

4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.

5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’srecommended cleaning time.When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, thecut tape detection feature will be active again.

A non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner which uses acassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape headcan be used. This type of cleaning cassette will noteject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may notclean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaningcassette is not recommended.

3-91

After the player is cleaned, press and hold the ejectbutton for five seconds to reset the CLEAN indicator.The radio will display --- or CLEANED to show theindicator was reset.

Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound qualitymay degrade over time. Always make sure the cassettetape is in good condition before the tape player isserviced.

Care of Your CDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their original casesor other protective cases and away from directsunlight and dust. If the surface of a CD is soiled,dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergentsolution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.

Be sure never to touch the side without writing whenhandling CDs. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edgesor the edge of the hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD PlayerThe use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is notadvised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of theCD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washeswithout being damaged. If the mast should everbecome slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If themast is badly bent, replace it.

Check occasionally to make sure the mast is stilltightened.

Chime Level AdjustmentThe radio is the vehicle’s chime producer. To changethe volume level, press and hold pushbutton 6 withthe ignition on and the radio power off. The chimevolume level will change from the normal level to loud,and LOUD will appear on the radio display. Tochange back to the default or normal setting, press andhold pushbutton 6 again. The chime level will changefrom the loud level to normal, and NORMAL will appearon the radio display. Removing the radio and notreplacing it with a factory radio or chime will disablevehicle chimes.

3-92

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2Drunken Driving .............................................4-2Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5Braking .........................................................4-6Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................4-7Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-8Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-9Locking Rear Axle ........................................4-10Steering ......................................................4-11Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-13Passing .......................................................4-13Loss of Control .............................................4-15Off-Road Driving ...........................................4-16Driving at Night ............................................4-39Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-40City Driving ..................................................4-43Freeway Driving ...........................................4-44Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-45

Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-46Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-46Winter Driving ..............................................4-48If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,

Ice or Snow ..............................................4-52Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-53Recovery Loops ...........................................4-53First Aid Kit and Tool Kit ...............................4-55Front Mounted Receiver .................................4-56Power Winch Platform ...................................4-57Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-58

Towing ..........................................................4-64Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-64Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-64Selectable Extended Rear Ride Height .............4-66Electronically Controlled Air Suspension

System ....................................................4-67Trailer Recommendations ...............................4-68Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-68

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

4-1

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drivedefensively.

Please start with a very important safety device in yourvehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are forEveryone on page 1-16.

Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”On city streets, rural roads, or freeways, it means“always expect the unexpected.”

Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going tobe careless and make mistakes. Anticipate whatthey might do. Be ready for their mistakes.

Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough followingdistance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, inboth city and rural driving. You never know when thevehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly.

Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate onthe driving task. Anything that distracts from the drivingtask — such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call,reading, or reaching for something on the floor — makes

proper defensive driving more difficult and can evencause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger tohelp do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe placeto do them yourself. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking and driving isa national tragedy. It is the number one contributorto the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victimsevery year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drivea vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,these deaths are the result of someone who wasdrinking and driving. In recent years, more than16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have beenassociated with the use of alcohol, with more than300,000 people injured.

4-2

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adultpopulation — choose never to drink alcohol, so theynever drive after drinking. For persons under 21,it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.There are good medical, psychological anddevelopmental reasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drink alcohol andthen drive. But what if people do? How much is “toomuch” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot lessthan many might think. Although it depends on eachperson and situation, here is some general informationon the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someonewho is drinking depends upon four things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed before andduring drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BACof about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the

same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glassesof wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, ifthe same person drank three double martinis (3 ouncesor 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’sBAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A personwho consumes food just before or during drinking willhave a somewhat lower BAC level.

4-3

There is a gender difference, too. Women generallyhave a lower relative percentage of body waterthan men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, thismeans that a woman generally will reach a higher BAClevel than a man of her same body weight will wheneach has the same number of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some othercountries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is0.05 percent in both France and Germany. TheBAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United Statesis 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to sixdrinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, andhow quickly the person drinks them.

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skillsof many people are impaired at a BAC approaching0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. Alldrivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.Statistics show that the chance of being in a collisionincreases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having acollision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chanceof this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at alevel of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol inone drink. No amount of coffee or number of coldshowers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not theright answer. What if there is an emergency, a need totake sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able toreact quickly enough to avoid the collision.

4-4

There is something else about drinking and driving thatmany people do not know. Medical research shows thatalcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuriesworse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, orheart. This means that when anyone who has beendrinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, thatperson’s chance of being killed or permanently disabledis higher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by even a smallamount of alcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.Please do not drink and drive or ride with adriver who has been drinking. Ride home in acab; or if you are with a group, designate adriver who will not drink.

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehicle gowhere you want it to go. They are the brakes, thesteering, and the accelerator. All three systems have todo their work at the places where the tires meetthe road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, itis easy to ask more of those control systems thanthe tires and road can provide. That means you can losecontrol of your vehicle. See Traction Control System(TCS) on page 4-9.

4-5

BrakingBraking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.That is perception time. Then you have to bring up yourfoot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as two or three seconds ormore with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of asecond, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenyour vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatlywith the surface of the road, whether it is pavementor gravel; the condition of the road, whether it iswet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of your brakes;the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brakeforce applied.

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This isa mistake. Your brakes may not have time to coolbetween hard stops. Your brakes will wear out muchfaster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pacewith the traffic and allow realistic following distances,you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.That means better braking and longer brake life.

If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brakenormally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,the pedal may get harder to push down. If your enginestops, you will still have some power brake assist.But you will use it when you brake. Once the powerassist is used up, it may take longer to stop andthe brake pedal will be harder to push.

4-6

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advancedelectronic braking system that will help prevent abraking skid.

When you start your engine and begin to drive away,your anti-lock brake system will check itself. Youmay hear a momentary motor or clicking noise whilethis test is going on. This is normal.

If there is a problem withthe anti-lock brake system,this warning light willstay on. See Anti-LockBrake System WarningLight on page 3-34.

Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slamon the brakes and continue braking. Here is whathappens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. Ifone of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes at each front wheeland at both rear wheels.

4-7

The anti-lock system can change the brake pressurefaster than any driver could. The computer isprogrammed to make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controls braking pressureaccordingly.

Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedal or alwaysdecrease stopping distance. If you get too close tothe vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to applyyour brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, eventhough you have anti-lock brakes.

Using Anti-LockDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedaldown firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feelthe brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise,but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesWith anti-lock brakes, you can steer and brake at thesame time. In many emergencies, steering can help youmore than even the very best braking.

4-8

Traction Control System (TCS)Your vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS) thatlimits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slipperyroad conditions. The system operates only if it sensesthat any of the wheels are spinning or beginning to losetraction. When this happens, the system applies thebrakes to limit wheel spin.

The Traction Control System may operate on dry roadsunder some conditions. When this happens, you maynotice a reduction in acceleration or a pumping sound.This is normal and doesn’t mean there’s a problem withyour vehicle. Examples of these conditions include hardacceleration in a turn, an abrupt upshift or downshift ofthe transmission or driving on rough roads.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the TCS beginsto limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automaticallydisengage. When road conditions allow you to safelyuse it again, you may re-engage the cruise control. SeeCruise Control on page 3-10.

Another feature of this system is the Traction Control 2(TC2) mode. TC2 should be selected for improvedtraction and system performance when the vehicle is onloose surfaces such as deep sand or mud.

To enter this mode,press the TC2 buttonlocated on the instrumentpanel to the right ofthe steering wheel.

TC2 only operates in the following transfer case modes:

• 4HI Lock

• 4LO Lock

• 4LO Lock and Rear Axle Lock

See Locking Rear Axle on page 4-10 for moreinformation on the rear axle lock.

It will not operate in 4HI. If the TC2 button is pressedwhile in 4HI, the light will flash for about 15 seconds andthen go out. The light should also come on brieflywhen you turn the ignition key to RUN; if it doesn’t seeyour dealer for service.

If you restart your engine, the system reverts to thestandard TCS mode.

4-9

The traction off light willcome on when a TractionControl System orAnti-Lock Brake Systemproblem has beendetected and the vehicleneeds service.

See Traction Off Light on page 3-34.

When the traction off light is on, adjust your drivingaccordingly.

The traction control system, as delivered from thefactory, will automatically come on whenever you startyour vehicle.

Locking Rear AxleThe locking rear axle can give your vehicle additionaltraction from the rear wheels when traveling in off-roadsituations such as mud, snow, sand, steep hills anduneven terrain.

The button used to turnthis feature on or off islocated above the transfercase buttons to theright of the steering wheel.

To lock the rear axle, do the following:

1. Place the transfer case in the 4LO Lock mode. Thisis the only mode which will allow the rear axle tolock. See All-Wheel Drive on page 2-31 formore information regarding the transfer case and4LO Lock mode.

2. Press the button with the vehicle stopped or movingless than 2 mph (3 km/h).

4-10

You must wait for the light in the button to stop flashingand remain illuminated before the rear axle is locked.

Notice: If you try to lock the rear axle whileyour vehicle is stuck and the tires are spinning, youcould damage your vehicle’s drivetrain. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Always lock the rear axle before attemptingsituations and/or navigating terrain which couldpossibly cause the vehicle to become stuck.

The locking rear axle will be disengaged when thevehicle’s speed is greater than 20 mph (32 km/h), if thevehicle’s battery is low and/or the transfer case isshifted out of 4LO Lock mode.

Notice: If you lock the rear axle while driving onpavement, you could damage your vehicle’sdrivetrain. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Do not use the locking rear axle onpavement. If you need four-wheel drive whentraveling on pavement, use only 4HI.

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because the enginestops or the system is not functioning, you can steer butit will take much more effort.

Steering TipsDriving on CurvesIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned onthe news happen on curves. Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject tothe same laws of physics when driving on curves.The traction of the tires against the road surface makesit possible for the vehicle to change its path whenyou turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertiawill keep the vehicle going in the same direction. Ifyou have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, youwill understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends on thecondition of your tires and the road surface, the angle atwhich the curve is banked, and your speed. While you arein a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly accelerate. Both controlsystems — steering and acceleration — have to do theirwork where the tires meet the road. Adding thesudden acceleration can demand too much of thoseplaces. You can lose control. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 4-9.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up onthe accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way youwant it to go, and slow down.

4-11

Speed limit signs near curves warn that you shouldadjust your speed. Of course, the posted speedsare based on good weather and road conditions. Underless favorable conditions you will want to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your frontwheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through thecurve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until you are out of the curve, and thenaccelerate gently into the straightaway.

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be more effective thanbraking. For example, you come over a hill and find atruck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls outfrom nowhere, or a child darts out from between parkedcars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid theseproblems by braking — if you can stop in time. Butsometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the timefor evasive action — steering around the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies likethese. First apply your brakes. See Braking on page 4-6.It is better to remove as much speed as you can from apossible collision. Then steer around the problem, to theleft or right depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attention and aquick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel atthe recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, youcan turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you have to act fast, steerquickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheelonce you have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensive drivingat all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-12

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder while youare driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off theaccelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge ofthe pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up toone-quarter turn until the right front tire contactsthe pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lanehighway is a potentially dangerous move, since thepassing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncomingtraffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error injudgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or angercan suddenly put the passing driver face to face with theworst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sidesand to crossroads for situations that might affectyour passing patterns. If you have any doubtwhatsoever about making a successful pass,wait for a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings andlines. If you can see a sign up ahead that mightindicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.A broken center line usually indicates it is allright to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane ora double solid line, even if the road seems emptyof approaching traffic.

4-13

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For onething, following too closely reduces your area ofvision, especially if you are following a largervehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space ifthe vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and donot get too close. Time your move so you will beincreasing speed as the time comes to move into theother lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have arunning start that more than makes up for thedistance you would lose by dropping back. And ifsomething happens to cause you to cancel yourpass, you need only slow down and drop back againand wait for another opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,wait your turn. But take care that someone is nottrying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slowvehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder andcheck the blind spot.

• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder andstart your left lane change signal before moving outof the right lane to pass. When you are far enoughahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in yourinside mirror, activate your right lane change signaland move back into the right lane. Remember that ifyour right outside mirror is convex, the vehicle youjust passed may seem to be farther away from youthan it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time ontwo-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the nextvehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it maybe slowing down or starting to turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you canease a little to the right.

4-14

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enough frictionwhere the tires meet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steerand constantly seek an escape route or area of lessdanger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions, and by not overdrivingthose conditions. But skids are always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’sthree control systems. In the braking skid, your wheelsare not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too muchspeed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and losecornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too muchthrottle causes the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,your vehicle may straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, youwill want to slow down and adjust your driving tothese conditions. It is important to slow down on slipperysurfaces because stopping distance will be longer andvehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including engine braking by shifting to alower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tiresto slide. You may not realize the surface is slipperyuntil your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warningclues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snowon the road to make a mirrored surface — andslow down when you have any doubt.

Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helpsavoid only the braking skid.

4-15

Off-Road DrivingThis off-road guide is meant to provide advice for whenyou drive your vehicle off paved roads. Also, seeBraking on page 4-6.

Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does havesome definite hazards. The greatest of these isthe terrain itself.

“Off-roading” means you have left the great NorthAmerican road system behind. Traffic lanes are notmarked. Curves are not banked. There are noroad signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill ordownhill. In short, you have gone right back to nature.

Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that is whyit is very important that you read this guide. You will findmany driving tips and suggestions. These will help makeyour off-road driving safer and more enjoyable.

Before You Go Off-RoadingThere are some things to do before you go out. Forexample, be sure to have all necessary maintenanceand service work done. Check to make sure allunderbody shields are properly attached. Make sure anyequipment you may need — first aid kit, cell phone,flashlight, etc. — is securely stored in the vehicle.

Be sure you read all the information about yourfour-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual. Is there enoughfuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluidlevels up where they should be? What are the locallaws that apply to off-roading where you will be driving?If you do not know, you should check with lawenforcement people in the area. Will you be onsomeone’s private land? If so, be sure to get thenecessary permission.

Removable Side StepsYour vehicle may be equipped with removableside steps.

Remove the steps prior to off-roading to give yourvehicle more ground clearance and to prevent damageto the vehicle from the side steps dragging and/orcatching on obstacles.

Notice: Do not drive off-road with the side stepsattached to your vehicle. You can damage the sidesteps and/or your vehicle’s frame if they get caughtor drag against an obstacle. This damage would notbe covered by your vehicle’s warranty. Alwaysremove the side steps prior to any off-road driving.

4-16

U-Type Side StepsThe following instructions show how to install theoptional U-type steps. If you want to remove them, justreverse the instructions:

1. Start with the side step brackets pointing up andaway from you, or just make sure the HUMMERlogo faces up.

2. For the front step, use the first and third bracketson the vehicle from the front tire. For the rear step,use the first and third brackets on the vehiclefrom the rear tire.You will notice that the side steps have pins onboth sides of the step brackets. This is because thesteps are interchangeable between front/backand the driver/passenger sides of the vehicle. Usethe pins as follows:

• Driver Side: Look at the side step with theHUMMER logo facing you. You will use the pinswhich are on the right side of each side stepbracket. This works for the front or rear ofthe vehicle.

• Passenger Side: Look at the side step with theHUMMER logo facing you. You will use the pinswhich are on the left side of each side stepbracket. This works for the front or rear of thevehicle.

3. Guide the pins on the side step brackets into theholes in the vehicle’s rocker panel protectorbrackets. If you have difficulty doing this, it mayhelp to have someone hold up the step while youguide the pins into the holes.You will be guiding three pins into the holes withthe fourth hole in the vehicle’s rocker panel protectorbrackets empty until the next step.

4-17

4. Thread the knob through the remaining hole — firstinto the rocker panel protector and then into thethreaded hole in the side step bracket.

Notice: Threading the knob into the side step andthen into the rocker panel will not secure the step.The step could fall off the vehicle and be damaged.Always thread the knob through the rocker panelfirst. After the knob is installed, try moving the stepleft and right to be sure the step is secure.

5. Hand-tighten the knob by turning it clockwise until itis seated against the rocker panel protector bracketand then tighten it to 10 lb ft (13.5 Y) with thetool as shown.

4-18

6. Once the knob istorqued, install thecotter pin through thehole in the end of theknob’s threaded shaft.

This will help prevent the knob from coming completelyloose and falling out.

Tubular Side Steps

The driver’s side of the vehicle is shown with the bodyremoved for clarity. To remove a step:

1. Remove the nuts and bolts attaching the step to thevehicle.

2. Remove the step from the vehicle.

4-19

To install a step:

1. Before installing the bolts:

• Remove all traces of the original adhesive patch.

• Clean the threads of the bolts with denaturedalcohol or equivalent and allow threads to dry.

• Apply Threadlocker (GM Part No. 12345382, inCanada 10953489) or equivalent.

2. Install the side step to the vehicle. You may needsomeone to assist you in the installation.

3. Install the nuts and bolts for the two inner bracketsfirst, but do not tighten them.

4. Using a level, make sure the step is level inrelationship to the vehicle. Then, tighten theinner bracket nuts and bolts.

5. Install the other nuts and bolts. Tighten all nuts andbolts to 39 lb ft (50 Y).

Loading Your Vehicle for Off-RoadDrivingThere are some important things to remember abouthow to load your vehicle.

• The heaviest things should be on the load floor andforward of your rear axle. Put heavier items in therear area, as far forward as you can.

• Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving onthe off-road terrain does not toss things around.

4-20

{CAUTION:

• Cargo on the load floor piled higher thanthe seatbacks can be thrown forwardduring a sudden stop. You or yourpassengers could be injured. Keep cargobelow the top of the seatbacks.

• Unsecured cargo on the load floor can betossed about when driving over roughterrain. You or your passengers can bestruck by flying objects. Secure the cargoproperly.

• Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’scenter of gravity, making it more likely toroll over. You can be seriously or fatallyinjured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavyloads inside the cargo area, not on theroof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as farforward and low as possible.

You will find other important information in this manual.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-58 and Tireson page 5-52.

Environmental ConcernsOff-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfyingrecreation. However, it also raises environmentalconcerns. We recognize these concerns and urge everyoff-roader to follow these basic rules for protectingthe environment:

• Always use established trails, roads and areas thathave been specially set aside for public off-roadrecreational driving; obey all posted regulations.

• Avoid any driving practice that could damagethe environment — shrubs, flowers, trees,grasses — or disturb wildlife (this includeswheel-spinning, breaking down trees orunnecessary driving through streams or oversoft ground).

• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuse isremoved from any campsite before leaving.

• Take extreme care with open fires (wherepermitted), camp stoves and lanterns.

• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or othercombustible materials that could catch fire fromthe heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.

4-21

Traveling to Remote AreasIt makes sense to plan your trip, especially when goingto a remote area. Know the terrain and plan yourroute. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn ofany blocked or closed roads.

It is also a good idea to travel with at least one othervehicle. If something happens to one of them, the othercan help quickly.

Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to readthe winch instructions. In a remote area, a winchcan be handy if you get stuck. But you will want to knowhow to use it properly.

High Mobility CharacteristicsThe HUMMER H2 has a 10 inch (25.4 cm) runningground clearance (A) and a 9 inch (22.8 cm) axleto ground clearance (B) while maintaining a lowsilhouette and a low center of gravity.

4-22

The HUMMER H2 has an approximate approach angle(A) of 42° and a departure angle (B) of 37°, dependingon suspension packages.

Design specifications required a minimum gradeability of60% (31°) slope, with the vehicle fully loaded, on highfriction surfaces at 6 mph (9.7 km/h). The vehicle isexpected to traverse this grade only for short durations.Never stop and idle the vehicle or park it on this grade.

4-23

Also, your vehicle should be able to traverse a 40%(22°) side slope at 6 mph (9.7 km/h) while fully loadedon high friction surfaces.

Your vehicle can climb a 16 inch (40.6 cm) vertical step.Step climbing is best done by approaching the step atan angle rather than straight on.

4-24

Brake and Accelerator OperationTechniques for Off-Road DrivingFor logs, walls, rocks, severe ditches,hills, sand, etc.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. Do not rev theengine.

2. Select the proper transmission and transfer casegear range; usually FIRST (1) gear, 4LO LOCK forsuch obstacles.

3. If wheel spin is experienced, maintain steadythrottle, with your foot off the brake pedal, toallow the TCS to control the wheel spin. TCS willnot operate if the brakes are applied, even slightly.

4. If wheel spin cannot be controlled by the system,fully press the brake pedal with your left foot so allwheel spin is halted.

5. Back away from the obstacle so that a newapproach can be tried.

6. As the first wheel crosses the obstacle, be preparedto alternate the brake and accelerator pedal tomaintain control and avoid tire drop-off fromobstacles. Repeat this process for the other wheels.

For mounds, washouts, loose up-hillslopes, ditches, etc.When wheel spin occurs as the vehicle is moving, thedriver may notice a slight shaking or shuddering ofthe vehicle. This should be stopped as soon as possibleto prevent damage to vehicle components. This is theindication that a loss of traction is occurring on thisterrain. The operator should:

1. Reduce speed and apply the brakes.

2. Assess the terrain properly and adjust vehiclespeed and gear ranges accordingly: 4HI positionfor higher speeds and 4LO LOCK for more torqueand lower speeds. Transmission FIRST (1) gearis generally recommended.

3. Apply slight pressure to the brake when the shakingor shuddering sensation is felt, keeping the vehiclemoving in a controlled manner.

4. Be prepared to alternate between braking andaccelerating through the adverse terrain.

4-25

Getting Familiar with Off-Road DrivingIt is a good idea to practice in an area that is safeand close to home before you go into the wilderness.Off-road driving does require some new and differentskills. Here is what we mean.

Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Youreyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrainfor unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listenfor unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms,hands, feet and body, you will need to respond tovibrations and vehicle bounce.

Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-roaddriving. One of the best ways to control your vehicleis to control your speed. Here are some things to keepin mind. At higher speeds:

• you approach things faster and you have less timeto scan the terrain for obstacles.

• you have less time to react.

• you have more vehicle bounce when you drive overobstacles.

• you will need more distance for braking, especiallysince you are on an unpaved surface.

{CAUTION:

When you are driving off-road, bouncing andquick changes in direction can easily throwyou out of position. This could cause you tolose control and crash. So, whether you aredriving on or off the road, you and yourpassengers should wear safety belts.

Scanning the TerrainOff-road driving can take you over many different kindsof terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrainand its many different features. Here are some things toconsider.

Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you overhard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snowor ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,acceleration and braking of your vehicle in differentways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,delayed acceleration, poor traction and longer brakingdistances.

4-26

Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles canbe hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startleyou if you are not prepared for them. Often theseobstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or eventhe rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are somethings to consider:

• Is the path ahead clear?

• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?

• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?There is more discussion of these subjects later.

• Will you have to stop suddenly or change directionquickly?

When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep afirm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs orother surface features can jerk the wheel out of yourhands if you are not prepared.

When possible, it is a good practice to survey thelandscape ahead on foot prior to driving to observehidden obstacles.

When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,even with one or two wheels, you cannot control thevehicle as well or at all.

Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it isespecially important to avoid sudden acceleration,sudden turns or sudden braking.

In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind ofalertness from driving on paved roads and highways.There are no road signs, posted speed limits orsignal lights. You have to use your own good judgmentabout what is safe and what is not.

Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on anyroad. And this is certainly true for off-road driving. At thevery time you need special alertness and drivingskills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount of alcohol. Youcould have a serious — or even fatal — accident if youdrink and drive or ride with a driver who has beendrinking. See Drunken Driving on page 4-2.

4-27

Crossing ObstaclesApproach Angl e — a Key to MobilityIf you encounter a large dip in the terrain, do not enterstraight on; enter at an angle — 15° minimumapproach (A), 75° maximum approach angle (B). Forvery large dips, ditches or small washes, coast in, usingthe engine as a brake (transmission and transfercase lowest gears). Then, use the low ranges in thetransmission and transfer case to power out.

Roll Your Tires Over Large Rocks

Do not straddle largerocks; drive over them,letting the tire envelop therock. The tread of thetire is thicker and tougherthan the sidewall of thetire and is more resilient toimpact than underbodycomponents.

4-28

Log CrossingUsing the proper technique, your vehicle will cross logsup to 10 inches (25.4 cm) in diameter. Approach thelog at approximately a 15° angle (A) with thetransmission in FIRST (1) and the transfer case in 4LOLOCK and “walk” your vehicle over, one tire at atime. As with all obstacles, face your tires perpendicularto the object for best traction and tire life. It may benecessary to modulate your brake pedal and acceleratorto avoid spin-out. Ease the vehicle down from the logwith your brake.

Driving on Off-Road HillsOff-road driving often takes you up, down or across ahill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgmentand an understanding of what your vehicle can andcannot do. There are some hills that simply cannot bedriven, no matter how well built the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drivedown them, you cannot control your speed. Ifyou drive across them, you will roll over. Youcould be seriously injured or killed. If you haveany doubt about the steepness, do not drivethe hill.

4-29

Approaching a HillWhen you approach a hill, you need to decide if it isone of those hills that is just too steep to climb, descendor cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a verysmall hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constantincline with only a small change in elevation whereyou can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill,the incline may get steeper as you near the top, butyou may not see this because the crest of the hillis hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs.

Here are some other things to consider as you approacha hill:

• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill getsharply steeper in places?

• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will thesurface cause tire slipping?

• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so youwill not have to make turning maneuvers?

• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block yourpath, such as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?

• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, anembankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walkthe hill if you do not know. It is the smart way tofind out.

• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often haveruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks becausethey are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.

Driving UphillOnce you decide you can safely drive up the hill, youneed to take some special steps:

• Use transmission and transfer case low gear andget a firm grip on the steering wheel.

• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintainyour speed. Do not use more power than youneed, because you do not want your wheels to startspinning or sliding.

• Let the traction system work to control any wheelslippage. The traction control system allows formoderate wheel spin with some capability to dig inand power up the hill.

4-30

• Do not continue if the vehicle shudders or exhibitssuspension hopping. This can cause damage tothe driveline or suspension components. Improperdriving technique is not covered by your vehiclewarranty.

• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. Ifthe path twists and turns, you might want to findanother route.

{CAUTION:

Turning or driving across steep hills can bedangerous. You could lose traction, slidesideways, and possibly roll over. You could beseriously injured or killed. When driving uphills, always try to go straight up.

• Ease up on your speed as you approach the top ofthe hill.

• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you morevisible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.

• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hillto let opposing traffic know you are there.

• Use your headlamps even during the day. Theymake you more visible to oncoming traffic.

{CAUTION:

Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speedcan cause an accident. There could be adrop-off, embankment, cliff, or even anothervehicle. You could be seriously injured orkilled. As you near the top of a hill, slow downand stay alert.

4-31

Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is aboutto stall, and I cannot make it up the hill?

A: If this happens, there are some things you shoulddo, and there are some things you must not do.First, here is what you should do:

• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keepit from rolling backwards. Also, apply theparking brake.

• If your engine is still running, shift the transmissionto REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, andslowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).

• If your engine has stopped running, you will need torestart it. With the brake pedal pressed and theparking brake still applied, shift the transmission toPARK (P) and restart the engine. Then, shift toREVERSE (R), release the parking brake, andslowly back down the hill as straight as possible inREVERSE (R).

• As you are backing down the hill, put your left handon the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position.This way, you will be able to tell if your wheels arestraight and maneuver as you back down. It isbest that you back down the hill with your wheelsstraight rather than in the left or right direction.Turning the wheel too far to the left or rightwill increase the possibility of a rollover.

Here are some things you must not do if you stall, orare about to stall, when going up a hill:

• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting intoNEUTRAL (N) to rev-up the engine and regainforward momentum. This will not work. Your vehiclewill roll backwards very quickly and you could goout of control.Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle.Then apply the parking brake. Shift toREVERSE (R), release the parking brake, andslowly back straight down.

• Never attempt to turn around if you are about tostall when going up a hill. If the hill is steepenough to stall your vehicle, it is steep enough tocause you to roll over if you turn around. If youcannot make it up the hill, you must back straightdown the hill.

4-32

Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down thehill and decide I just cannot do it. What shouldI do?

A: Set the parking brake, put your transmission inPARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leave thevehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphillside and stay clear of the path the vehicle wouldtake if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfercase to NEUTRAL when you leave the vehicle.Leave it in some gear.

{CAUTION:

Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL cancause your vehicle to roll even if thetransmission is in PARK (P). This is becausethe NEUTRAL position on the transfer caseoverrides the transmission. You or someoneelse could be injured. If you are going to leaveyour vehicle, set the parking brake and shiftthe transmission to PARK (P). But do not shiftthe transfer case to NEUTRAL. Leave thetransfer case in the 4 HI, 4 HI Lock, or 4 LOLock position.

Driving DownhillWhen off-roading takes you downhill, you will want toconsider a number of things:

• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintainvehicle control?

• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?

• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?Boulders?

• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hiddencreek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?

4-33

If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try tokeep your vehicle headed straight down, and use alow gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakesand they will not have to do all the work. Descendslowly, keeping your vehicle under control at all times.

{CAUTION:

Heavy braking when going down a hill cancause your brakes to overheat and fade. Thiscould cause loss of control and a seriousaccident. Apply the brakes lightly whendescending a hill and use a low gear to keepvehicle speed under control.

Q: Are there some things I should not do whendriving down a hill?

A: Yes! These are important because if you ignorethem you could lose control and have a seriousaccident:

• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take youacross the incline of the hill. A hill that is not toosteep to drive down may be too steep to driveacross. You could roll over if you do not drivestraight down.

• Never go downhill with the transmission inNEUTRAL (N). This is called “free-wheeling.” Yourbrakes will have to do all the work and couldoverheat and fade.

Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?

A: It is much more likely to happen going uphill. But ifit happens going downhill, here is what to do:

1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.Apply the parking brake.

2. Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking, restart theengine.

3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,and drive straight down.

4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.

4-34

Driving Across an InclineSooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go acrossthe incline of a hill. If this happens, you have todecide whether to try to drive across the incline. Hereare some things to consider:

• A hill that can be driven straight up or down maybe too steep to drive across. When you gostraight up or down a hill, the length of the wheelbase — the distance from the front wheels tothe rear wheels — reduces the likelihood the vehiclewill tumble end over end. But when you driveacross an incline, the much more narrow trackwidth — the distance between the left andright wheels — may not prevent the vehicle fromtilting and rolling over. Also, driving across an inclineputs more weight on the downhill wheels. Thiscould cause a downhill slide or a rollover.

• Surface conditions can be a problem when youdrive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots,or even wet grass can cause your tires to slipsideways, downhill. If the vehicle slips sideways, itcan hit something that will trip it — a rock, arut, etc. — and roll over.

• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of theincline even worse. If you drive across a rock with theuphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rutor depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.

For reasons like these, you need to decide carefullywhether to try to drive across an incline. Just because thetrail goes across the incline does not mean you have todrive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.

{CAUTION:

Driving across an incline that is too steep willmake your vehicle roll over. You could beseriously injured or killed. If you have anydoubt about the steepness of the incline, donot drive across it. Find another route instead.

Q: What if I am driving across an incline that is nottoo steep, but I hit some loose gravel and startto slide downhill. What should I do?

A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,turn downhill. This should help straighten out thevehicle and prevent the side slipping. However,a much better way to prevent this is to get out and“walk the course” so you know what the surfaceis like before you drive it.

4-35

Stalling on an InclineIf your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline,be sure you, and any passengers, get out on theuphill side, even if the door there is harder to open. Ifyou get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts toroll over, you will be right in its path.

If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the paththe vehicle will take if it does roll over.

{CAUTION:

Getting out on the downhill (low) side of avehicle stopped across an incline isdangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you couldbe crushed or killed. Always get out on theuphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay wellclear of the rollover path.

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or IceWhen you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels willnot get good traction. You cannot accelerate asquickly, turning is more difficult, and you will need longerbraking distances.

It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud — thedeeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deepmud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you donot get stuck. Be careful to keep mud from buildingup and washing onto the engine cooling system.

4-36

When you drive on sand, you will sense a change inwheel traction. But it will depend upon how looselypacked the sand is. On loosely packed sand, such ason beaches or sand dunes, your tires will tend tosink into the sand. This has an effect on steering,accelerating and braking. Drive at a reduced speed andavoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.

Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that youwill have difficulty accelerating. And if you do getmoving, poor steering and difficult braking can causeyou to slide out of control.

{CAUTION:

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers canbe dangerous. Underwater springs, currentsunder the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken theice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice andyou and your passengers could drown. Driveyour vehicle on safe surfaces only.

Driving in WaterHeavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood watersdemand extreme caution.

Find out how deep the water is before you drive throughit. If it is deep enough to cover your wheel hubs,axles or exhaust pipe, do not try it — you probably willnot get through. Also, water that deep can damageyour axle and other vehicle parts. Your vehicle iscapable of depths up to 20 inches. Know how to judgewhether the water is deeper than this beforeproceeding into it.

4-37

If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it. Atfaster speeds, water splashes on your ignitionsystem and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can alsooccur if you get your tailpipe under water. And, as longas your tailpipe is under water, you will never beable to start your engine. When you go through water,remember that when your brakes get wet, it maytake you longer to stop.

{CAUTION:

Driving through rushing water can bedangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicledownstream and you and your passengerscould drown. If it is only shallow water, it canstill wash away the ground from under yourtires, and you could lose traction and roll thevehicle over. Do not drive throughrushing water.

See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 4-40 formore information on driving through water.

After Off-Road DrivingRemove any brush or debris that has collected on theunderbody, chassis or under the hood. Theseaccumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand, have the brake liningscleaned and checked. These substances can causeglazing and uneven braking. Check the engine and oilcoolers for mud accumulation. Thoroughly and carefullyclean these devices to allow proper cooling. Checkthe body structure, steering, suspension, wheels, tiresand exhaust system for damage. Also, check thefuel lines and cooling system for any leakage.

Your vehicle will require more frequent service due tooff-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedulefor additional information.

4-38

Driving at Night

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely to beimpaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night visionproblems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may need toslow down and keep more space between youand other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Yourheadlamps can light up only so much road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe placeand rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. Butas we get older these differences increase. A50-year-old driver may require at least twice as muchlight to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend the day in brightsunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Youreyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if youare driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. Theymay cut down on glare from headlamps, but they alsomake a lot of things invisible.

4-39

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, or even severalseconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. Whenyou are faced with severe glare, as from a driverwho does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle withmisaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoidstaring directly into the approaching headlamps.

Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicleclean — inside and out. Glare at night is made muchworse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glasscan build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makeslights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that your headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keepyour eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as your headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyesbe examined regularly. Some drivers suffer fromnight blindness — the inability to see in dim light — andare not even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wetroad, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as wellbecause your tire-to-road traction is not as good as ondry roads. And, if your tires do not have much treadleft, you will get even less traction. It is always wise togo slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall whileyou are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly whenyour reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.

4-40

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if yourwindshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavyrain can make it harder to see road signs andtraffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shapeand keep your windshield washer tank filled withwasher fluid. Replace your windshield wiper insertswhen they show signs of streaking or missing areas onthe windshield, or when strips of rubber start toseparate from the inserts.

Driving too fast through large water puddles or evengoing through some car washes can cause problems,too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoidpuddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before youhit them.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will notwork as well in a quick stop and may causepulling to one side. You could lose control ofthe vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle of wateror a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightlyuntil your brakes work normally.

4-41

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build upunder your tires that they can actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road is wet enough andyou are going fast enough. When your vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if yourtires do not have much tread or if the pressure inone or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water isstanding on the road. If you can see reflectionsfrom trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, andraindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could behydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. Therejust is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly through deeppuddles or standing water, water can come inthrough your engine’s air intake and badly damageyour engine. Never drive through water that isslightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. Ifyou cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,drive through them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.If you try to drive through flowing water, as youmight at a low water crossing, your vehicle canbe carried away. As little as six inches offlowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.If this happens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do not ignore policewarning signs, and otherwise be very cautiousabout trying to drive through flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following

distance. And be especially careful when youpass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clearroom ahead, and be prepared to have yourview restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tireson page 5-52.

4-42

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets is theamount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out forwhat the other drivers are doing and pay attention totraffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your trip intoan unknown part of the city just as you would for across-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time and energy.See Freeway Driving on page 4-44.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A trafficlight is there because the corner is busy enoughto need it. When a light turns green, and just beforeyou start to move, check both ways for vehiclesthat have not cleared the intersection or maybe running the red light.

4-43

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are thesafest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keepup with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at thesame speed most of the other drivers are driving.Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to thefreeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as youdrive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to checktraffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend withthe flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to theprevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check yourmirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often asnecessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to theposted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then useyour turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over yourshoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle inyour blind spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain youallow a reasonable following distance. Expect tomove slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, donot, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Driveon to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.The exit speed is usually posted.

4-44

Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, notto your sense of motion. After driving for any distanceat higher speeds, you may tend to think you aregoing slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If youmust start when you are not fresh — such as aftera day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles thatfirst part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothingand shoes you can easily drive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needsservice, have it done before starting out. Of course, youwill find experienced and able service experts in GMdealerships all across North America. They will be readyand willing to help if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Areall windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checkedall levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough forlong-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to therecommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlookalong your route? Should you delay your trip ashort time to avoid a major storm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

4-45

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call ithighway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of road withthe same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on theroad, the drone of the engine, and the rush of thewind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Donot let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle canleave the road in less than a second, and you couldcrash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, beaware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with acomfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead andto the sides. Check your mirrors and yourinstruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, get someexercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsinesson the highway as an emergency.

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is different fromdriving in flat or rolling terrain.

4-46

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips that can makeyour trips safer and more enjoyable. See Off-RoadDriving on page 4-16 for information about drivingoff-road.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluidlevels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,and transmission. These parts can work hardon mountain roads.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you godown a steep or long hill.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakes could getso hot that they would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking or even nonegoing down a hill. You could crash. Shift downto let your engine assist your brakes on asteep downhill slope.

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with theignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing down. They couldget so hot that they would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking or even nonegoing down a hill. You could crash. Alwayshave your engine running and your vehicle ingear when you go downhill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift downto a lower gear. The lower gears help cool yourengine and transmission, and you can climb thehill better.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive at speedsthat let you stay in your own lane.

4-47

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalled car oran accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocksarea, or winding roads. Be alert to these and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergency supplies inyour vehicle.

Also see Tires on page 5-52.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winterouter clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a redcloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,if you will be driving under severe conditions, includea small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple ofburlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure youproperly secure these items in your vehicle.

4-48

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where your tires meetthe road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between your tires andthe road, you can have a very slippery situation. Youwill have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to bevery careful.

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snowor ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet icecan be even more trouble because it may offer the leasttraction of all. You can get wet ice when it is aboutfreezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Tryto avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crewscan get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,or loose snow — drive with caution.

The traction control system (TCS) improves your abilityto accelerate when driving on a slippery road. If youare driving in deep snow, turn your TCS to theTC2 mode. It will improve your ability to accelerate. SeeIf Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snowon page 4-52. Even though your vehicle has TCS, youwill want to slow down and adjust your driving tothe road conditions. Under certain conditions, you maywant to turn the TCS off, such as when drivingthrough deep snow and loose gravel, to help maintainvehicle motion at lower speeds. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 4-9.

4-49

Your anti-lock brake system (ABS) improve yourvehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on aslippery road. Even though you have ABS, you will wantto begin stopping sooner than you would on drypavement. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) onpage 4-7.

• Allow greater following distance on anyslippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fineuntil you hit a spot that is covered with ice. Onan otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear inshaded areas where the sun cannot reach, suchas around clumps of trees, behind buildings,or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curveor an overpass may remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch ofice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try notto brake while you are actually on the ice, andavoid sudden steering maneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in aserious situation. You should probably stay withyour vehicle unless you know for sure that you are nearhelp and you can hike through the snow. Here aresome things to do to summon help and keep yourselfand your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police thatyou have been stopped by the snow.

4-50

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, makebody insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbonmonoxide) gas to get inside. CO couldovercome you and kill you. You cannot see itor smell it, so you might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow from around thebase of your vehicle, especially any that isblocking your exhaust pipe. And check aroundagain from time to time to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side of thevehicle that is away from the wind. This willhelp keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. This savesfuel. When you run the engine, make it go a littlefaster than just idle. That is, push the acceleratorslightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get andit keeps the battery charged. You will need awell-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possiblyfor signaling later on with your headlamps. Let theheater run for a while.

4-51

Then, shut the engine off and close the window almostall the way to preserve the heat. Start the engineagain and repeat this only when you feel reallyuncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little aspossible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To helpkeep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and dosome fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so untilhelp comes.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you willneed to spin the wheels, but you do not want tospin your wheels too fast. The method known as rockingcan help you get out when you are stuck, but youmust use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your tires spin at high speed, theycan explode, and you or others could beinjured. And, the transmission or other parts ofthe vehicle can overheat. That could cause anengine compartment fire or other damage.When you are stuck, spin the wheels as littleas possible. Do not spin the wheels above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on thespeedometer.

Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts ofyour vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin thewheels too fast while shifting your transmissionback and forth, you can destroy your transmission.

For more information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-65.

4-52

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn your steering wheel left and right. Thatwill clear the area around your front wheels. Your vehiclehas a traction control system that will activate whenthe system senses that the wheels are spinning.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9 formore information. Then, with the wheels straight ahead,shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and aforward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and presslightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmissionis in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forwardand reverse directions, you will cause a rockingmotion that may free your vehicle. If that does not getyou out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out.Or, you can use your recovery loops. If you do needto be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-64.

Recovery Loops

Front of Vehicle

4-53

Your vehicle may beequipped with recoveryloops at the front and rearof your vehicle. Youmay need to use them ifyou are stuck off-road andneed to be pulled tosome place where you cancontinue driving.

{CAUTION:

These loops, when used, are under a lot offorce. Keep people away from the vicinity ofthe loops and any chains or cables during use.Always pull the vehicle straight out. Never pullon the loops at a sideways angle. The loopscould break off and you or others could beinjured from the chain or cable snapping back.

Notice: Never use the recovery loops to tow thevehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it wouldnot be covered by warranty.

Rear of Vehicle

4-54

First Aid Kit and Tool KitThe first aid and tool kit is located in the storage binbehind the spare tire on SUV models. It is held in placewith a hook and loop fastener strap.

On SUT models, the kit is in the rear cargo compartmenton the passenger side of the vehicle.

The kit includes a first aid kit, a flashlight, a tire pressuregage, and a multi-purpose tool set.

The tire pressure gage has a reset button in the gagestem. After taking a pressure reading, press thebutton to reset the gage to zero.

4-55

Front Mounted Receiver Your vehicle is equipped with a front mounted receiver.

You can use the receiver with a power winch platform(described later in this section) or with otheraccessories.

Never use the front mounted receiver to tow a trailer.

You can use the front mounted receiver to tow yourvehicle behind another. See Recreational VehicleTowing on page 4-64.

Receiver ExtensionUse the receiver extension (if equipped) with the frontmounted receiver and various light-duty accessoriessuch as bike racks.

Notice: Do not attach accessories or cargo thatweigh more than 240 lbs. (108 kg) to the receiverextension. You could damage the receiver extensionand/or your vehicle’s frame components.

The receiver extension was not intended for heavy-dutyuse, such as trailer towing, winching or vehiclerecovery.

4-56

To use the front mounted receiver with the receiverextension, do the following:

1. Locate the receiver extension (A) in the rear of thevehicle where it is attached to the spare tiremounting plate.

2. Loosen the wing nuts (B) holding the extension tothe spare tire plate and remove it.

3. The extension attaches to the front receiver exactlyas the power winch platform does. See “PowerWinch Platform” following in this section.

4. Attach the accessory you will be using to thereceiver extension.

Power Winch PlatformYou can use the power winch platform (if equipped) withan aftermarket winch. Connect the winch to theplatform and wiring to the vehicle following the winchmanufacturer’s guidelines.

Notice: Do not use the winch platform to winch ata tension of more than 9,000 lbs. (4 082 kg). Thiswould damage your vehicle’s frame. This damagewould not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.

If you are using a winch to pull out another vehicle,follow the winch manufacturer’s guidelines and observethe following to prevent damage to your vehicle:

• If possible, have your vehicle anchored from theopposite side of the winch to a solid, immovableobject.If winching from the front, use both of the rearrecovery loops. If winching from the rear, use bothof the front recovery loops.

• Put your transmission in NEUTRAL (N).

• Use your regular brakes to hold your vehicle inplace and block the wheels to keep the vehicle frommoving.

4-57

Notice: Using a power winch with the transmissionin gear to pull out another vehicle may damagethe transmission. When operating a power winch,always leave the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).

Notice: Driving your vehicle through an automaticcar wash with the winch installed, can causedamage to your vehicle and the car wash. Alwaysremove the winch from your vehicle before using anautomatic car wash. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 5-94 for more information.

If you are using a winch to pull out your own vehicle,follow the winch manufacturer’s guidelines for selfrecovery and observe the following to prevent damageto your vehicle:

• Do not self recover your vehicle by wrapping thewinch cable around an object (such as a pulleyblock or tree) and attaching it back to your vehicle’srecovery loops.

• Always attach the winch cable directly to a solidanchor directly in front of your vehicle to achievea straight line pull.

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehiclecapacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labelson your vehicle show how much weight it may properlycarry, the Tire and Loading Information label and theCertification/Tire label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or eitherthe maximum front or rear Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). If you do, parts on yourvehicle can break, and it can change the wayyour vehicle handles. These could cause youto lose control and crash. Also, overloadingcan shorten the life of your vehicle.

4-58

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label isattached to the center pillar (B-pillar). With the driver’sdoor open, you will find the label attached belowthe door lock post (striker). The tire and loadinginformation label shows the number of occupant seatingpositions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacityweight (B) in kilograms and pounds.

The Tire and Loading Information label also shows thesize of the original equipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For moreinformation on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-52and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-58.

There is also important loading information on thevehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle.See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver andpassengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

Label Example

4-59

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount ofcargo and luggage load capacity. For example, ifthe “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will befive 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amountof available cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage andcargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weightmay not safely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load fromyour trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determine how this reducesthe available cargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

See Towing a Trailer on page 4-68 for importantinformation on towing a trailer, towing safety rules andtrailering tips.

Item Description Total

A Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtract OccupantWeight 150 lbs(68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)

Example 1

4-60




750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)




1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information labelfor specific information about your vehicle’s capacityweight and seating positions. The combined weight ofthe driver, passengers and cargo should neverexceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.

Example 2 Example 3

4-61

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached tothe rear edge of the driver’s door.

The label shows the gross weight capacity of yourvehicle. This is called the GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,all occupants, fuel and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximumweights for the front and rear axles, called GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loadson your front and rear axles, you need to go to a

weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer canhelp you with this. Be sure to spread out your loadequally on both sides of the centerline.Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWRfor either the front or rear axle.And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spreadit out.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or eitherthe maximum front or rear Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). If you do, parts on yourvehicle can break, and it can change the wayyour vehicle handles. These could cause youto lose control and crash. Also, overloadingcan shorten the life of your vehicle.

Your warranty does not cover parts or components thatfail because of overloading.The label will help you decide how much cargo andinstalled equipment your truck can carry.

Using heavier suspension components to get addeddurability might not change your weight ratings. Ask yourdealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.

4-62

If you put things inside your vehicle – like suitcases,tools, packages, or anything else – they go as fast asthe vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle can strikeand injure people in a sudden stop or turn, orin a crash.

• Put things in the cargo area of yourvehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.

• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so that some of themare above the tops of the seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured child restraintin your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded down unlessyou need to.

There’s also important loading information for off-roaddriving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehiclefor Off-Road Driving” under Off-Road Driving onpage 4-16.

Add-On EquipmentWhen you carry removable items, you may need to puta limit on how many people you can carry insideyour vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle before youbuy and install the new equipment.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) of the front or rear axle.

The Cargo Weight Rating (CWR) is the maximumweight of the load your vehicle can carry. It doesn’tinclude the weight of the people inside. But youcan figure about 150 lbs. (68 kg) for each seat.

The total cargo load must not be more than yourvehicle’s CWR.

4-63

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towing service ifyou need to have your disabled vehicle towed. SeeRoadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehiclefor recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing your vehiclebehind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.The two most common types of recreational vehicletowing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehiclewith all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See “DinghyTowing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

Here are some important things to consider before youdo recreational vehicle towing:

• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’srecommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long they can tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professional foradditional advice and equipment recommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as youwould prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’llwant to make sure your vehicle is prepared to betowed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip onpage 4-45.

4-64

Dinghy TowingUse the following procedure to tow your vehicle:

1. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).

2. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition inaccessory.

3. Firmly set the parking brake.

4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the towvehicle.

5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N). SeeAll-Wheel Drive on page 2-31 for the properprocedure to select the NEUTRAL position for yourvehicle.

6. Release the parking brake only after the vehiclebeing towed is firmly attached to the towingvehicle. You can use your vehicle’s front mountedreceiver with the proper accessories to tow it.See “Front Mounted Receiver” under If Your Vehicleis Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-52.

7. Turn the ignition to accessory.

When towing your vehicle for extended periods of time,start your vehicle as often as possible to preventbattery drain. This should only be done when the towvehicle is parked.

{CAUTION:

Shifting an all-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfercase into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle toroll even if the transmission is in Park (P). Youor others could be injured. Make sure theparking brake is firmly set before you shift thetransfer case to NEUTRAL.

Dolly TowingYour vehicle cannot be dolly towed. If you must towyour vehicle behind another, use the dinghy towingprocedure listed previously.

Notice: Dolly towing your vehicle will damagedrivetrain components. Do not dolly tow yourvehicle.

4-65

Selectable Extended Rear RideHeightIf your vehicle has this feature it comes as part of theelectronically controlled air suspension system.

The selectable rear ride height allows you to raise therear of the vehicle about 2 inches (5 cm) over the normalride height. This can be helpful when driving off-roadwhere you may need more ground clearance to clear anobstacle.

The button that controlsthis feature is located onthe instrument panel to theright of the steering wheel.

To use this feature, ensure that the following conditionsare met:

• The engine must be running.• All doors must be fully closed. The suspension will

not raise or lower if a door is open.• The vehicle speed must be less than 40 mph

(64 km/h). The system will not activate otherwise.

Press the height control button to raise the rear of thevehicle.

A light in the button will begin to flash as the rear of thevehicle rises. Once the extended height has beenreached (this may take up to a minute), the warninglight will stop flashing and will stay lit while the vehicle isat the extended height.To lower the vehicle to the normal ride height, press thebutton again. The light in the button will flash as thesuspension lowers. When the light in the button stopsflashing and goes out, the suspension has reachedthe normal ride height.

This feature will lower the vehicle to the normal height ifvehicle speed exceeds 40 mph (64 km/h).You may also want to use this feature when ascending,descending or cresting a steep hill as this can helpprevent the rear bumper from dragging on the base ofthe hill or prevent the vehicle from grounding out(high centering) on the crest of the hill.

Do not use this feature when towing a trailer.

4-66

Electronically Controlled AirSuspension SystemThe electronically controlled air suspension, if equipped,keeps the rear of your vehicle level as you load andunload it. The system includes a compressor, two heightsensor and two air springs supporting the vehicle.

The engine must be running for the system to level thevehicle after loading or unloading. The system willsuspend leveling if any of the doors are open. Once thedoors are closed, system leveling will continue.

You may hear the compressor running when you loadyour vehicle, and periodically as the system adjuststhe vehicle to the standard ride height. You mayalso hear the release of air similar to a hissing soundduring suspension operation. This is normal.

Load leveling will not function normally with the inflatorhose attached to the inflator outlet. Remove theinflater hose from the outlet when it is not in use. SeeAccessory Inflator on page 5-65.

Overload and Overheat ProtectionOverload protection is designed to protect the airsuspension system and is an indication to the driver thatthe vehicle is overloaded.

If the rear suspension remains at a low height, the rearaxle load has exceeded GAWR (Gross Axle WeightRating). When the overload protection mode is activated,the compressor operates for about 30 seconds to oneminute without raising the vehicle depending on theamount of overload. This will continue each timethe ignition is turned on until the rear axle load isreduced below GAWR.

If the total rear GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) isreached, the suspension may be slightly less than level.This is normal and does not mean there is a problemwith the air suspension.

If the system overheats, it will shut down and stop allleveling functions until the system cools down.During this time the SERVICE AIR SUSPENSIONmessage will appear in the DIC. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-47 for more information.

4-67

Trailer RecommendationsYou must subtract your hitch loads from the CargoWeight Rating (CWR). CWR is the maximum weight ofthe load your vehicle can carry. It doesn’t includethe weight of the people inside. But you can figure about150 lbs. (68 kg) for each seat. The total cargo loadmust not be more than your vehicle’s CWR.

Weigh your vehicle with the trailer attached, so that youwon’t go over the GVWR or GAWR. If you are usinga weight-distributing hitch, weigh the vehicle without thespring bars in place.

You’ll get the best performance if you spread out theweight of your load the right way, and if you choose thecorrect hitch and trailer brakes.

For more information, see Towing a Trailer onpage 4-68.

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipment anddrive properly, you can lose control when youpull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not work well — or evenat all. You and your passengers could beseriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you havefollowed all the steps in this section. Ask yourdealer for advice and information about towinga trailer with your vehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damageyour vehicle and result in costly repairs not coveredby your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, followthe advice in this part, and see your dealer forimportant information about towing a trailer withyour vehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, youshould read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” thatappears later in this section.

4-68

If yours was built with trailering options, as many are,it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is differentthan just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering meanschanges in handling, acceleration, braking, durabilityand fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to be used properly.

That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,important trailering tips and safety rules. Many ofthese are important for your safety and that of yourpassengers. So please read this section carefully beforeyou pull a trailer.

If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speed limitrestrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sureyour rig will be legal, not only where you livebut also where you’ll be driving. A good source forthis information can be state or provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” laterin this section.

• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,axle or other parts could be damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that youtow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps yourengine and other parts of your vehicle wear in atthe heavier loads.

• You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shiftthe transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, alower gear selection if the transmission shiftstoo often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hillyconditions). See “Tow/Haul Mode” following.

Three important considerations have to do with weight:

• the weight of the trailer

• the weight of the trailer tongue

• and the weight on your vehicle’s tires

4-69

Tow/Haul ModeTow/haul mode is used when using your vehicle to pulla large or heavy load or trailer. Tow/haul is alsouseful while pulling a load in rolling terrain, instop-and-go traffic, or when you need improvedlow-speed control, such as when parking. The purposeof the tow/haul mode is to do the following:

• Reduce the frequency and improve the predictabilityof transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer ora large or heavy load.

• Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling aheavy trailer or a large or heavy load as whenthe vehicle is unloaded.

• Improve control of vehicle speed while requiringless accelerator pedal activity when pulling aheavy trailer or a large or heavy load.

Tow/haul mode is most effective when the vehicle andtrailer combined weight is at least 75 percent of thevehicle’s Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR).See “Weight of the Trailer” later in this section.

Press the button on theinstrument panel to theright of the steeringwheel to enable thetow/haul mode.

A light on the instrumentpanel will illuminate toindicate that tow/haulmode has been selected.

Press the button again to turn off tow/haul mode. Theindicator light on the instrument panel will turn off.The vehicle will automatically turn off tow/haul modeevery time it is started.

Driving with tow/haul mode activated without a heavyload or with no trailer will cause reduced fuel economyand unpleasant engine and transmission drivingcharacteristics, but will not cause damage.

4-70

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how you plan to use your rig. Forexample, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is used to pulla trailer are all important. And, it can also dependon any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.

Use the following chart to determine how much yourvehicle can weigh, based upon your vehicle model andoptions.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only thedriver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the requiredtrailering equipment. The weight of additional optionalequipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehiclemust be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.

Engine Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight **GCWR6000 V8 4.10 6,700 lbs (3 039 kg) 13,500 lbs (6 123 kg)**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) in the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not beexceeded.

You can ask your dealer for our trailering information oradvice, or you can write us at the address listed inyour Warranty and Owner Assistance InformationBooklet.

In Canada, write to:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

4-71

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weightto measure because it affects the total gross weightof your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo youmay carry in it, and the people who will be riding inthe vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce thetongue weight your vehicle can carry, which willalso reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. Ifyou will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue loadto the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying thatweight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-58 formore information about your vehicle’s maximum loadcapacity.

The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up to amaximum of 500 lbs (227 kg) with a weight carryinghitch. The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percentto 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), upto a maximum of 700 lbs (318 kg) with a weightdistributing hitch.

Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weightfor your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extensionthat will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle. Thiswill help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight onthe rear axle.

After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and thenthe tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. Ifthey aren’t, you may be able to get them right simply bymoving some items around in the trailer.

4-72

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limitfor cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on theCertification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door orsee Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-58. Then besure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,or the GAWR, including the weight of the trailer tongue.If you use a weight distributing hitch, make sure youdon’t go over the rear axle limit before you applythe weight distribution spring bars.

HitchesIt’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads area few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.

Weight-Distributing Hitches and WeightCarrying Hitches

When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch mustbe adjusted so that the distance (A) remains thesame both before and after coupling the trailer to thetow vehicle.

(A) Body-to-Ground Distance (B) Front of Vehicle

4-73

If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, willweigh more than 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg) be sure to use aproperly mounted weight-distributing hitch and swaycontrol of the proper size. This equipment is veryimportant for proper vehicle loading and good handlingwhen driving. You should always use a sway controlif your trailer will weigh more than these limits. You canask a hitch dealer about sway controls.

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between your vehicleand your trailer. Cross the safety chains under thetongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue fromcontacting the road if it becomes separated fromthe hitch. Always leave just enough slack so you canturn with your rig. Never allow safety chains to drag onthe ground.

Trailer BrakesIf your trailer weighs more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg)loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and they must beadequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructionsfor the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install,adjust and maintain them properly.

Your trailer brake system can tap into the vehicle’shydraulic brake system only if:

• The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi(20 650 kPa) of pressure.

• The trailer’s brake system will use less than0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’smaster cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systemswon’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.

If everything checks out this far, make the brake tap atthe port on the master cylinder that sends the fluidto the rear brakes. But don’t use copper tubing for this.If you do, it will bend and finally break off. Use steelbrake tubing.

4-74

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to getto know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel ofhandling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.And always keep in mind that the vehicle you aredriving is now a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electricbrakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and thenapply the trailer brake controller by hand to be surethe brakes are working. This lets you check yourelectrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that theload is secure, and that the lamps and any trailerbrakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead asyou would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.This can help you avoid situations that requireheavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou’ll need more passing distance up ahead whenyou’re towing a trailer. Because you’re a gooddeal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond thepassed vehicle before you can return to your lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that handto the left. To move the trailer to the right, move yourhand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,have someone guide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns while traileringcould cause the trailer to come in contact with thevehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoidmaking very sharp turns while trailering.

When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns thannormal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky orsudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.

4-75

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerThe arrows on your instrument panel will flash wheneveryou signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other driversyou’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrumentpanel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailerare burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behindyou are seeing your signal when they are not. It’simportant to check occasionally to be sure the trailerbulbs are still working.

Driving On GradesReduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you startdown a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shiftdown, you might have to use your brakes so much thatthey would get hot and no longer work well.

You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift thetransmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lowergear selection if the transmission shifts too often(e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).

You may also want to activate the tow/haul mode ifthe transmission shifts too often. See “Tow/HaulMode” earlier.

When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lowertemperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn yourengine off immediately after towing at high altitudeon steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signssimilar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let theengine run while parked (preferably on level ground)with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) for afew minutes before turning the engine off. If you do getthe overheat warning, see Engine Overheating onpage 5-26.

4-76

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle, with atrailer attached, on a hill. If something goeswrong, your rig could start to move. Peoplecan be injured, and both your vehicle and thetrailer can be damaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’show to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift intoPARK (P) yet.

2. Have someone place chocks under the trailerwheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release theregular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply yourparking brake and shift into PARK (P).

5. Release the regular brakes.

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill

1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal downwhile you:

• start your engine,

• shift into a gear, and

• release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and store thechocks.

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often when you’repulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for moreon this. Things that are especially important in traileroperation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system andbrake system. Each of these is covered in this manual,and the Index will help you find them quickly. Ifyou’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sectionsbefore you start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and boltsare tight.

4-77

Trailer Wiring HarnessHeavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Package

Your vehicle is equipped with a trailer towing harness.This harness with a seven-pin universal heavy-dutytrailer connector is attached to a bracket on the hitchplatform.

The trailer towing harness contains the following trailercircuits:

• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal

• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal

• Brown: Taillamps

• White: Ground

• Light Green: Back-up Lamps

• Light Blue: Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL)

• Red: Battery Feed

• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake

A jumper harness for an electric trailer brake controllerand a trailer battery feed fuse may be included withthis trailering package. See “Instrument Panel JumperWiring Harness” later in this section.

If you need to tow a light-duty trailer with a standardfour-way, round pin connector, an adapter may beincluded. See “Four-Wire Harness Adapter” later in thissection.

4-78

Instrument Panel Jumper Wiring Harness

Notice: If your vehicle has factory ordealer-installed HUMMER off-road lamps, the placewhere an electric trailer brake connection mustbe made is already in use. Do not attempt todouble-up or “piggyback” the connection, becausethis could cause a failure or damage to yourvehicle, the electric trailer brake system, or both. Ifyou want to connect a trailer with electric brakesto your vehicle, see your dealer to disconnectthe off-road lamps. Also, read Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 5-100 for more information.

This harness may be included with your vehicle as partof the heavy-duty trailer wiring package.

{CAUTION:

Be sure to use only the correct trailer brakeharness, the one intended for use on yourvehicle. If you use some other trailer brakeharness, even if it seems to fit, your trailerbrakes may not work at all. You could have acrash in which you or others could be injured.Use only the trailer brake harness intended foryour vehicle. If it is no longer available to you,be sure to get a proper replacement from yourdealer.

This harness is for an electric brake controller andincludes a trailer battery feed fuse. It should be installedby your dealer or a qualified service center.

4-79

Four-Wire Harness Adapter

This adapter may beincluded with your vehicleas part of the heavy-dutytrailer wiring package.

Use this adapter to connect a standard four-way roundpin connector to the seven-wire harness on yourvehicle.

Connect the adapter with the tab pointing up. The flipcap on the vehicle’s seven-wire harness will lockonto the tab (see arrow in the previous graphic) andhelp hold the adapter in place. Plug the four-way roundpin connector onto the adapter.

4-80

Service ............................................................5-3Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your

Vehicle ......................................................5-5Fuel ................................................................5-5

Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5California Fuel ...............................................5-5Additives .......................................................5-6Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-6Filling the Tank ..............................................5-7Filling a Portable Fuel Container .......................5-9

Checking Things Under the Hood .....................5-9Hood Release ..............................................5-10Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12Engine Oil ...................................................5-13Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-16Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-18Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-21Engine Coolant .............................................5-24Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-26Engine Overheating .......................................5-26Overheated Engine Protection

Operating Mode ........................................5-28Cooling System ............................................5-29Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-33

Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-34Brakes ........................................................5-35Battery ........................................................5-38Jump Starting ...............................................5-39

All-Wheel Drive ..............................................5-43Rear Axle .......................................................5-44Front Axle ......................................................5-44Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-45

Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-45Headlamps ..................................................5-46Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ..............5-47Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................5-47Roof Marker Lamps ......................................5-48Taillamps .....................................................5-49Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-50

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-51Tires ..............................................................5-52

Tire Sidewall Labelling ...................................5-53Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-56Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-58Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-59When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-61Buying New Tires .........................................5-61Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-62Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-63

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-1

Wheel Replacement ......................................5-64Tire Chains ..................................................5-65Accessory Inflator .........................................5-65If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-67Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-68Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-69Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire ................................................5-77Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-84Spare Tire ...................................................5-89

Appearance Care ............................................5-90Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-90Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-92Leather .......................................................5-92Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic

Surfaces ..................................................5-93Wood Panels ...............................................5-93Speaker Covers ............................................5-93Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-93Weatherstrips ...............................................5-93Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-94Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-94

Finish Care ..................................................5-95Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades .........5-95Aluminum Wheels .........................................5-96Tires ...........................................................5-96Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-97Finish Damage .............................................5-97Underbody Maintenance ................................5-97Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-97Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-98

Vehicle Identification ......................................5-99Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-99Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-99

Electrical System ..........................................5-100Add-On Electrical Equipment .........................5-100Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................5-100Power Windows and Other Power Options ......5-100Fuses and Circuit Breakers ..........................5-101Instrument Panel Fuse Block ........................5-101Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..............5-104Underhood Fuse Block ................................5-105

Capacities and Specifications ........................5-110

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-2

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you tobe happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealerfor all your service needs. You will get genuine GM partsand GM-trained and supported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/oremit chemicals known to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects or other reproductiveharm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, andsome component wear by-products contain and/or emitthese chemicals.

5-3

Doing Your Own Service WorkIf you want to do some of your own service work, youwill want to use the proper service manual. It tellsyou much more about how to service your vehicle thanthis manual can. To order the proper service manual,see Service Publications Ordering Information onpage 7-11.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting todo your own service work, see Servicing YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-68.

You should keep a record with all parts receipts and listthe mileage and the date of any service work youperform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-14.

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle could bedamaged if you try to do service work on avehicle without knowing enough about it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacement parts,and tools before you attempt any vehiclemaintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, andother fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

5-4

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour VehicleThings you might add to the outside of your vehicle canaffect the airflow around it. This may cause windnoise and affect windshield washer performance. Checkwith your dealer before adding equipment to theoutside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important part of theproper maintenance of your vehicle.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octaneof 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may geta heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs,use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine. Alittle pinging noise when you accelerate or drive uphill isconsidered normal. This does not indicate a problemexists or that a higher-octane fuel is necessary. If you areusing 87 octane or higher-octane fuel and hear heavyknocking, your engine needs service.

Gasoline SpecificationsIt is recommended that gasoline meet specificationswhich were developed by automobile manufacturersaround the world and contained in the World-Wide FuelCharter which is available from the Alliance ofAutomobile Manufacturers atwww.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm. Gasolinemeeting these specifications could provide improveddriveability and emission control system performancecompared to other gasoline.

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet California EmissionStandards, it is designed to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. See the underhoodemission control label. If this fuel is not availablein states adopting California emissions standards, yourvehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emission control systemperformance may be affected. The malfunction indicatorlamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail asmog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 3-37. If this occurs, return to your authorized GMdealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that thecondition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairsmay not be covered by your warranty.

5-5

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United Statesare now required to contain additives that will helpprevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,allowing your emission control system to work properly. Inmost cases, you should not have to add anything to yourfuel. However, some gasolines contain only the minimumamount of additive required to meet U.S. EnvironmentalProtection Agency regulations. General Motorsrecommends that you buy gasolines that are advertisedto help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean. If yourvehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors orvalves, try a different brand of gasoline. Also, your GMdealer has additives that will help correct and preventmost deposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers andethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available inyour area to contribute to clean air. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines, particularly ifthey comply with the specifications described earlier.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel thatcontains methanol. Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuelsystem and also damage the plastic and rubberparts. That damage would not be covered underyour warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancing additivecalled methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasolinewhether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors doesnot recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuelscontaining MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs andthe performance of the emission control system maybe affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer forservice.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outside theUnited States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hardto find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuelnot recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costlyrepairs caused by use of improper fuel would notbe covered by your warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

5-6

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire cancause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries toyou and others, read and follow all theinstructions on the pump island. Turn off yourengine when you are refueling. Do not smokeif you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materialsaway from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended when refueling your vehicle — thisis against the law in some places. Keepchildren away from the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The fuel cap is located onthe driver’s side of thevehicle.

Some vehicles may be equipped with a fuel door. Openthe door to access the fuel cap.

Some vehicles may be equipped with a locking fuel cap.Use the fuel cap key to unlock the fuel cap. If youever need a replacement key, your dealer can help youget one.

5-7

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left(counterclockwise). While refueling, let the fuel caphang by the tether, if it has one.

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray outon you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.This spray can happen if your tank is nearlyfull, and is more likely in hot weather. Openthe fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noiseto stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill thetank and wait a few seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuelfrom painted surfaces as soon as possible. SeeWashing Your Vehicle on page 5-94.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the right(clockwise) until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fullyinstalled. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or improperly installed. Thiswould allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-37.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, do notremove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or by notifying thestation attendant. Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to getthe right type. Your dealer can get one for you.If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp tolight and may damage your fuel tank and emissionssystem. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 3-37.

5-8

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while it is inyour vehicle. Static electricity discharge fromthe container can ignite the gasoline vapor.You can be badly burned and your vehicledamaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury toyou and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, oron any surface other than the ground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening before operatingthe nozzle. Contact should be maintaineduntil the filling is complete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engine partsand start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer andother fluids, and plastic or rubber. You orothers could be burned. Be careful not to dropor spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.

5-9

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Release both hood side latches.

2. Pull the handle locatedinside the vehicle tothe lower left ofthe steering wheel.

5-10

3. Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull theassist handles toward you to lift the hood.

4. Pull the hood open until it is supported by the cables.

Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are onproperly. To close the hood, do the following:

1. Hold up the hood a few inches from the closedposition and then let it go so that it has enoughforce to engage the hood latch.

2. Pull up on the assist handles to be sure that thehood is latched.

3. Latch both hood side latches.

5-11

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the VORTEC™ 6000 V8 engine here is what you will see:

5-12

A. Coolant Surge Tank. See Cooling System onpage 5-29 and Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Capon page 5-26.

B. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter and Air Filter RestrictionIndicator (If Equipped). See Engine Air Cleaner/Filteron page 5-18.

C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “AddingWasher Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluidon page 5-34.

D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 5-13.

E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 5-13.

F. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See“Checking the Fluid Level” under AutomaticTransmission Fluid on page 5-21.

G. Fan. See Cooling System on page 5-29.H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (GND). See Jump

Starting on page 5-39.I. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Out of View). See

Power Steering Fluid on page 5-33.J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on

page 5-39.K. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under

Brakes on page 5-35.L. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block

on page 5-105.M. Battery. See Battery on page 5-38.

Engine OilIf the CHECK OIL LEVEL message appears on theDriver Information Center (DIC), it means you need tocheck your engine oil level right away. For moreinformation, see CHECK OIL LEVEL under DICWarnings and Messages on page 3-47.

You should check your engine oil level regularly; this isan added reminder.

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check your engine oil every time youget fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oilmust be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 forthe location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutesto drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towelor cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove itagain, keeping the tip down, and check the level.

5-13

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is at or below the cross-hatched area at the tipof the dipstick, then you will need to add at least onequart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This sectionexplains what kind of oil to use. For engine oilcrankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specificationson page 5-110.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine hasso much oil that the oil level gets above thecross-hatched area that shows the proper operatingrange, the engine could be damaged.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12 forthe location of theengine oil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere inthe proper operating range. Push the dipstick all theway back in when you are through.

5-14

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for two things:

• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GMStandard GM6094M. You should look for and useonly an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is bestfor your vehicle.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosityoils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements should alsohave the starburstsymbol on the container.This symbol indicatesthat the oil has beencertified by the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API).

You should look for this information on the oil container,and use only those oils that are identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbolon the front of the oil container.

5-15

Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and showing the AmericanPetroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. Failure to use the recommendedoil can result in engine damage not covered byyour warranty.

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements foryour vehicle.

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provideeasier cold starting and better protection for your engineat extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to your oil. The recommended oilswith the starburst symbol that meet GM StandardGM6094M are all you will need for good performanceand engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets you knowwhen to change the engine oil and filter. This isbased on engine revolutions and engine temperature,and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated canvary considerably. For the oil life system to workproperly, you must reset the system every time the oil ischanged.

When the system has calculated that oil life has beendiminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary.A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will come on. Changeyour oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving under thebest conditions, the oil life system may not indicate thatan oil change is necessary for over a year. However, yourengine oil and filter must be changed at least once a yearand at this time the system must be reset. Your dealerhas GM-trained service people who will perform this workusing genuine GM parts and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check your oil regularly and keep it at theproper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since yourlast oil change. Remember to reset the oil life systemwhenever the oil is changed.

5-16

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when to changeyour engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it cancalculate when the next oil change is required. If asituation occurs where you change your oil prior to aCHANGE ENGINE OIL message being turned on, resetthe system.

To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message, see“Engine Oil Life System” under DIC Operation andDisplays on page 3-44 for vehicles equipped with theDIC, or do the following:

1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine off.

2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowlythree times within five seconds.If the OIL LIFE RESET message flashes for10 seconds, the system is resetting.

3. Turn the key to LOCK.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes back onwhen you start your vehicle, the engine oil life systemhas not reset. Repeat the procedure. If it still doesnot reset, see your dealer for service.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that may beunhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Cleanyour skin and nails with soap and water, or a goodhand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing orrags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from thefilter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting itin the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or intostreams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it bytaking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have aproblem properly disposing of your used oil, askyour dealer, a service station or a local recycling centerfor help.

5-17

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

Notice: If you spray water into the engine aircleaner/filter intake and water enters the engine aircleaner/filter housing, as shown in the illustration,you could damage your vehicle’s engine. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Do notspray water into the engine air cleaner/filter intakeand/or housing.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12 forthe location of theengine air cleaner/filter andthe air filter restrictionindicator (if equipped).

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterIf your vehicle is equipped with an air filter restrictionindicator, it lets you know when the engine aircleaner/filter needs to be replaced. On vehicles with arestriction indicator, you should inspect the air filterrestriction indicator at every oil change and replace theengine air cleaner/filter when the indicator tells youto. On vehicles without an air filter restriction indicator,you should inspect the air cleaner/filter at every oilchange and replace it at the first oil change after100,000 miles (160 000 km). See ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-4 for more information.

5-18

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Vehicles with an Air Filter RestrictionIndicatorLocate the air filter restriction indicator on the engine airduct. When the indicator turns black or is in thered/orange “change” zone, replace the filter and resetthe indicator. See “Inspecting the Engine AirCleaner/Filter and Resetting the Air Filter RestrictionIndicator” later in this section for further instructions.

Vehicles without an Air Filter RestrictionIndicatorTo inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove it from thevehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dustand dirt. If the engine air cleaner/filter remains cakedwith dirt, a new filter is required. See “Inspectingthe Engine Air Cleaner/Filter and Resetting the Air FilterRestriction Indicator” later in this section for furtherinstructions.

Inspecting the Engine Air Cleaner/Filterand Resetting the Air Filter RestrictionIndicator

1. Loosen the screws on the engine aircleaner/filter cover.

5-19

2. Lift the cover upward and set it aside.

3. Pull the air cleaner/filter up and out from the aircleaner housing. Care should be taken to dislodgeas little dirt as possible.

4. Clean the air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces and thehousing.

5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.

6. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.

7. Reset the air filter restriction indicator, if equipped,by pressing the top button on the indicator.If your vehicle is not equipped with the air filterrestriction indicator, refer to the MaintenanceSchedule to determine when to replace the engineair cleaner/filter. See Owner Checks and Serviceson page 6-9.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filteroff can cause you or others to be burned. Theair cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps tostop flame if the engine backfires. If it is notthere and the engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with the aircleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire cancause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt caneasily get into your engine, which will damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when youare driving.

5-20

Automatic Transmission Fluid

When to Check and Change AutomaticTransmission FluidA good time to check your automatic transmission fluidlevel is when the engine oil is changed.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed inAdditional Required Services on page 6-6, and be sureto use the transmission fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

How to Check Automatic TransmissionFluidBecause this operation can be a little difficult, you maychoose to have this done at the dealership servicedepartment.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructionshere, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damageyour transmission. Too much can mean that someof the fluid could come out and fall on hot enginepart or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.Too little fluid could cause the transmission tooverheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if youcheck your transmission fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransmission fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normaloperating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F(82°C to 93°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F(10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), drive the vehiclein THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gagemoves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.

A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle hasbeen sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,but this is used only as a reference. Let the enginerun at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are50°F (10°C) or more. If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), youmay have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluidlevel be low during this cold check, you must check thefluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hotwill give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.

5-21

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare your vehicle as follows:

• Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the enginerunning.

• With the parking brake applied, place the shift leverin PARK (P).

• With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shiftlever through each gear range, pausing for aboutthree seconds in each range. Then, position the shiftlever in PARK (P).

• Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.

Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:

The transmission dipstickhandle with this graphic islocated at the rear ofthe engine compartment,on the passenger’sside of the vehicle.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 formore information on location.

1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstickand wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.

2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds andthen pull it back out again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lowerlevel. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or inthe HOT or cross-hatched area for a hot check.Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get anaccurate reading.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way; then flip the handledown to lock the dipstick in place.

5-22

Consistency of ReadingsAlways check the fluid level at least twice using theprocedure described previously. Consistency (repeatablereadings) is important to maintaining proper fluid level. Ifinconsistent readings persist, check the transmissionbreather hose to be sure it is clean and unclogged. Ifreadings are still inconsistent, contact your dealer.

How to Add Automatic TransmissionFluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whatkind of transmission fluid to use. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid whileit is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. Ifthe fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluidto bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check.It does not take much fluid, generally less than one pint(0.5 L). Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmissionfluid may damage your vehicle, and the damagesmay not be covered by your warranty. Alwaysuse the automatic transmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.

• When the correct fluid level is obtained, push thedipstick back in all the way; then flip the handledown to lock the dipstick in place.

5-23

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designedto remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add onlyDEX-COOL® extended life coolant.

The following explains your cooling system and how toadd coolant when it is low. If you have a problemwith engine overheating, see Engine Overheating onpage 5-26.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work as theyshould.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL ® maycause premature engine, heater core or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the engine coolant mayrequire changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.

What Kind of Coolant to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water andone-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damagealuminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you donot need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, can boilbefore the proper coolant mixture will. Yourvehicle’s coolant warning system is set for theproper coolant mixture. With plain water or thewrong mixture, your engine could get too hotbut you would not get the overheat warning.Your engine could catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not be covered by yourwarranty. Too much water in the mixture can freezeand crack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts.

5-24

If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,have your dealer check your cooling system.

Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do nothave to add extra inhibitors or additives which claimto improve the system. These can be harmful.

Checking Coolant

The coolant surge tank islocated in the enginecompartment on thepassenger’s side of thevehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-12 for moreinformation on location.

{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap when theengine and radiator are hot can allow steamand scalding liquids to blow out and burn youbadly. Never turn the surge tank pressurecap — even a little — when the engine andradiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. When yourengine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULLCOLD mark.

5-25

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when theengine is cool.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,and it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it ishand-tight.

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure CapNotice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,coolant loss and possible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightlysecured.

The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fullyinstalled on the coolant surge tank. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 5-12 for moreinformation on location.

Engine OverheatingYou will find a coolant temperature gage on yourvehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gage on page 3-35.

In addition, you will find an ENGINE COOLANT HOT,ENGINE OVERHEATED and a REDUCED ENGINEPOWER message in the Driver Information Center (DIC)on the instrument panel. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-47.

5-26

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine can burnyou badly, even if you just open the hood. Stayaway from the engine if you see or hear steamcoming from it. Just turn it off and geteveryone away from the vehicle until it coolsdown. Wait until there is no sign of steam orcoolant before you open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. Youor others could be badly burned. Stop yourengine if it overheats, and get out of thevehicle until the engine is cool.

See Overheated Engine Protection OperatingMode on page 5-28 for information on drivingto a safe place in an emergency.

Notice: If your engine catches fire because youkeep driving with no coolant, your vehicle canbe badly damaged. The costly repairs would not becovered by your warranty. See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode on page 5-28 forinformation on driving to a safe place in anemergency.

If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineAn overheat warning, along with a low coolant condition,can indicate a serious problem.

If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or hearno steam, the problem may not be too serious.Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer. See Towing a Trailer on page 4-68.

5-27

If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,try this for a minute or so:

1. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fanspeed and open the windows as necessary.

2. If you are in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);otherwise, shift to the highest gear whiledriving — DRIVE (D).

If you no longer have the overheat warning, you candrive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.If the warning does not come back on, you can drivenormally.

If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pullover, stop, and park your vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam, push down theaccelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fastas normal idle speed for at least three minutes whileyou are parked. If you still have the warning, turn off theengine and get everyone out of the vehicle until itcools down. Also, see “Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode” later in this section.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to get servicehelp right away.

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating ModeIf an overheated engine condition exists and theREDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed, anoverheat protection mode which alternates firinggroups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. Inthis mode, you will notice a loss in power and engineperformance. This operating mode allows your vehicle tobe driven to a safe place in an emergency. Drivingextended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in theoverheat protection mode should be avoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheated engineprotection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,allow the engine to cool before attempting anyrepair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil andreset the oil life system. See Engine Oil onpage 5-13.

5-28

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is whatyou will see:

A. Coolant Surge TankB. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure CapC. Engine Cooling Fan

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, donot do anything else until it cools down. The vehicleshould be parked on a level surface.

The coolant level should be at or above the FULLCOLD mark. If it is not, you may have a leak at thepressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses,radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the coolingsystem.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engineparts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. Ifyou do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If yourun the engine, it could lose all coolant. Thatcould cause an engine fire, and you could beburned. Get any leak fixed before you drive thevehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.The engine cooling fan speed should increase when idlespeed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedaldown. If it does not, your vehicle needs service. Turn offthe engine.

5-29

Notice: Engine damage from running your enginewithout coolant is not covered by your warranty. SeeOverheated Engine Protection Operating Mode onpage 5-28 for information on driving to a safe placein an emergency.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL ® maycause premature engine, heater core or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the engine coolant mayrequire changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge TankIf you have not found a problem yet, check to see ifcoolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLDmark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable waterand DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank, butbe sure the cooling system, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it. SeeEngine Coolant on page 5-24 for more information.

If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant asfollows:

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot coolingsystem can blow out and burn you badly. Theyare under pressure, and if you turn the radiatorpressure cap — even a little — they can comeout at high speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the radiator pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system andradiator pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto turn the pressure cap.

5-30

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, can boilbefore the proper coolant mixture will. Yourvehicle’s coolant warning system is set for theproper coolant mixture. With plain water or thewrong mixture, your engine could get too hotbut you would not get the overheat warning.Your engine could catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crackthe engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.Use the recommended coolant and the propercoolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

1. Locate the coolantsurge tank pressurecap that has this label.

2. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressurecap when the cooling system, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap and upper radiatorhose, are no longer hot. Turn the pressure capslowly counterclockwise (left) about one full turn.If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss meansthere is still some pressure left.

3. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, andremove it.

5-31

4. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,to the FULL COLD mark.

5. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, startthe engine and let it run until you can feel the upperradiator hose getting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fan.By this time, the coolant level inside the coolantsurge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, addmore of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tankuntil the level reaches the FULL COLD mark.

6. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.

5-32

Power Steering Fluid

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 forpower steering fluid reservoir location.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluidunless you suspect there is a leak in the system oryou hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have the system inspectedand repaired.

How to Check Power Steering Fluid

Locate the cap with thissymbol. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-12 for moreinformation on location.

To check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartmentcool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level onthe dipstick.

The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. Ifnecessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up tothe mark.

5-33

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the properfluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to readthe manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you willbe operating your vehicle in an area where thetemperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection against freezing.

Adding Washer FluidYour vehicle has a low washer fluid message thatcomes on when the washer fluid is low. The message isdisplayed for 15 seconds at the start of each ignitioncycle if the fluid is low. When the LOW WASHER FLUIDmessage is displayed, you will need to add washerfluid to the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it. Addwasher fluid until thetank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-12 for reservoirlocation.

Notice:

• When using concentrated washer fluid, followthe manufacturer’s instructions for addingwater.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solution to freeze anddamage your washer fluid tank and other partsof the washer system. Also, water does notclean as well as washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quartersfull when it is very cold. This allows forexpansion if freezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in yourwindshield washer. It can damage your washersystem and paint.

5-34

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake master cylinderreservoir is filled withDOT-3 brake fluid. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12 forthe location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level inthe reservoir might go down. The first is that thebrake fluid goes down to an acceptable level duringnormal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,the fluid level goes back up. The other reason isthat fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, youshould have your brake system fixed, since a leakmeans that sooner or later your brakes will not workwell, or will not work at all.

So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluidwhen your linings are worn, then you will have toomuch fluid when you get new brake linings. You shouldadd or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill onthe engine. The fluid will burn if the engine ishot enough. You or others could be burned,and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brakefluid only when work is done on the brakehydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”in this section.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whento check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-4.

5-35

Checking Brake FluidYou can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.

Look at the brake fluidreservoir. The fluid levelshould be above MIN. If itis not, have your brakesystem checked tosee if there is a leak.

After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, makesure the level is above the MIN but not over theMAX mark.

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brakefluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed containeronly. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 6-12.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the areaaround the cap before removing it. This will helpkeep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in your brakesystem, your brakes may not work well, or theymay not even work at all. This could cause acrash. Always use the proper brake fluid.

Notice:

• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brakesystem parts. For example, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in yourbrake system can damage brake system parts sobadly that they will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s paintedsurfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Becareful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. Ifyou do, wash it off immediately. See AppearanceCare on page 5-90.

5-36

Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that makea high-pitched warning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed. The soundmay come and go or be heard all the time your vehicleis moving, except when you are pushing on thebrake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon your brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hear thebrake wear warning sound, have your vehicleserviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brakepads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brakesqueal when the brakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not mean something is wrong withyour brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspectbrake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts inthe proper sequence to GM torque specifications.

Brake linings should always be replaced as completeaxle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not return tonormal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you make a brake stop, your disc brakesadjust for wear.

5-37

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its manyparts have to be of top quality and work well together ifthe vehicle is to have really good braking. Yourvehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GMbrake parts. When you replace parts of your brakingsystem — for example, when your brake liningswear down and you need new ones put in — be sureyou get new approved GM replacement parts. If you donot, your brakes may no longer work properly. Forexample, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrongfor your vehicle, the balance between your front andrear brakes can change — for the worse. The brakingperformance you have come to expect can changein many other ways if someone puts in the wrongreplacement brake parts.

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it istime for a new battery, get one that has the replacementnumber shown on the original battery’s label. Werecommend an ACDelco® replacement battery. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for batterylocation.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of California to causecancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands afterhandling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days ormore, remove the black, negative (−) cable from thebattery. This will help keep your battery fromrunning down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gasthat can explode. You can be badly hurt if youare not careful. See Jump Starting onpage 5-39 for tips on working around a batterywithout getting hurt.

5-38

Jump StartingIf your battery has run down, you may want to useanother vehicle and some jumper cables to start yourvehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerousbecause:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly, someor all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costlydamage to your vehicle that would not be coveredby your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damage your vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-voltbattery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-voltsystem with a negative ground, both vehicles canbe damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cablescan reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touchingeach other. If they are, it could cause a groundconnection you do not want. You would not be ableto start your vehicle, and the bad groundingcould damage the electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, setthe parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved inthe jump start procedure. Put an automatictransmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmissionin NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.

Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessorieson during the jump starting procedure, they couldbe damaged. The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Always turn off your radio andother accessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplugunnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarettelighter or accessory power outlets. Turn off theradio and all lamps that are not needed. This willavoid sparks and help save both batteries. Andit could save your radio!

5-39

4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) andnegative (−) terminal locations of the other vehicle.Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jumpstarting terminal and a remote negative (−) jumpstarting terminal. You should always use theseremote terminals instead of the terminals on thebattery.

The remote positive (+)terminal is located near theengine accessory drivebracket. On some vehicles,the terminal may becovered by a red plasticcover. To access theremote positive (+)terminal, open the cover (ifequipped).

The remote negative (−)terminal is located on theengine accessory drivebracket and ismarked GND.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12for more information on the location of theremote terminals.

5-40

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can cause batterygas to explode. People have been hurt doingthis, and some have been blinded. Use aflashlight if you need more light.

Be sure the battery has enough water. You donot need to add water to the battery installedin your new vehicle. But if a battery has fillercaps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.If it is low, add water to take care of that first.If you do not, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get itin your eyes or on your skin, flush the placewith water and get medical help immediately.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose ormissing insulation. If they do, you could get ashock. The vehicles could be damaged too.

Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+) will go topositive (+) or to a remote positive terminal (+) ifthe vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal, if the vehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or youwill get a short that would damage the batteryand maybe other parts too.

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts can injureyou badly. Keep your hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)terminal of the dead battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it tothe positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use aremote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

5-41

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use aremote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything until thenext step. The other end of the negative (−) cabledoes not go to the dead battery. It goes to aheavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal on the vehicle with thedead battery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable atleast 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,but not near engine parts that move. The electricalconnection is just as good there, and the chanceof sparks getting back to the battery is much less.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle hasone. Your vehicle’s remote negative (−) terminalis marked GND.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and runthe engine for awhile.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. Ifit will not start after a few tries, it probably needsservice.

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electrical shorting mayoccur and damage the vehicle. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always connectand remove the jumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that the cables do not toucheach other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or RemoteNegative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) andNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

Jumper Cable Removal

5-42

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles dothe following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the othervehicle.

5. Return the positive (+) remote terminal cover(if equipped) to its original position.

All-Wheel DriveTransfer CaseIt is not necessary to regularly check transfer case fluidunless you suspect there is a leak or you hear anunusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.Have it inspected and repaired.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine howoften to change the lubricant. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-4.

How to Check Lubricant

A. Filler PlugB. Drain Plug

1. Remove the filler plug (A). The fluid level should bejust below the bottom of the filler plug hole. To getan accurate reading, the vehicle should be on alevel surface.

2. Add fluid if necessary.Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of lubricant to use. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

3. Reinstall the filler plug. Use care not to overtightenthe filler plug.

5-43

Rear AxleWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluidunless you suspect there is a leak or you hear anunusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.Have it inspected and repaired.


To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on alevel surface.

When the differential is cold, the proper level is from5/8 inch to 1-5/8 inch (15 mm to 40 mm) below thebottom of the filler plug hole. Add only enough fluid toreach the proper level.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whatkind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 6-12.

Front AxleWhen to Check and Change LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluidunless you suspect there is a leak or you hear anunusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.Have it inspected and repaired.

5-44


To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on alevel surface.

When the differential is cold, the proper level is fromabout 1/4 inch (6 mm) to about 3/8 inch (10 mm) belowthe filler plug hole.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whatkind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 6-12.

Bulb ReplacementSee Replacement Bulbs on page 5-50 for the propertype of bulb to use.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas insideand can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.You or others could be injured. Be sure to readand follow the instructions on the bulbpackage.

5-45

HeadlampsTo replace a headlamp bulb, do the following:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-10for more information.

2. Locate the affected headlamp on the inner frontportion of the hood.

3. Turn the bulb/socketretainercounterclockwise tounlock the bulb/socket.You may prefer tounplug the electricalconnector beforeremoving thebulb/socket. If so,complete Step 4 beforedoing this step.

4. Pull the bulb/socket straight out from the headlamphousing.

5. Unplug the electricalconnector.

6. Push the new bulb socket into the headlampassembly making sure to align the splines onthe bulb socket with the splines in the headlamphousing. Use care not to touch the bulb withyour fingers or hands.

7. Turn the bulb socket retainer clockwise to lock itinto place.

8. Plug in the electrical connector.

5-46

Front Turn Signal andParking LampsTo replace a front turn signal or parking lamp bulb, dothe following:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-10for more information.

2. Locate the bulb you wish to change.3. Turn the bulb socket

counterclockwise andremove it from the lamphousing.

4. Pull the bulb from the bulb socket.

5. Install the new bulb into the bulb socket.

6. Reinstall the bulb socket into the lamp housing andturn it clockwise until it locks.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)To replace a daytime running lamp bulb, do thefollowing:

1. Locate the lampassembly behind thefront bumper. It iseasiest to come in fromthe side of thevehicle through thewheel opening.

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and removeit from the lamp housing.

3. Remove the bulb from the bulb socket.


5. Reinstall the bulb socket into the lamp housing andturn it clockwise until it locks.

5-47

Roof Marker LampsCorner Roof Marker LampsTo replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Remove the screw and lift off the lens.2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it.3. Remove the bulb.4. Install a new bulb into the socket.

5. Reinstall the socket into the lens and turn itclockwise to lock it into place.

6. Hook the side of the lens with the hook end into thenotch first and then tighten the screw.

Center Roof Marker LampsTo replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Push in on the notch with a flat tool and pull thelamp out.



4. Install a new bulb into the bulb socket.

5. Place the hook end of the lamp in place on oneside and push the other end of the lamp downuntil it locks in place.

5-48

TaillampsA. StoplampB. Turn Signal LampC. Back-Up Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Open the liftgate or tailgate. See Liftgate (SUV) onpage 2-11 or Tailgate (SUT) on page 2-14 for moreinformation.

2. Remove the twoscrews from the rearlamp assemblyand remove the rearlamp assembly.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove itfrom the taillamp housing.

4. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.

5. Press a new bulb into the socket, insert it into thetaillamp housing and turn the socketcounterclockwise until it is locked in place.

6. Reinstall the rear lamp assembly and tighten thescrews.

5-49

Your vehicle may have a taillamp in the bumper. Toreplace it, do the following:

1. Locate the affectedtaillamp which isbehind and under thebumper.




5. Reinstall the bulb socket into the lamp housing andturn it clockwise to lock it.

Replacement BulbsExterior Lamp Bulb Number

Back-up Lamp 3156Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) 4114KFront Turn Signal andParking Lamp 4157K or 3157KX

Low-Beam and High-BeamHeadlamps 9007

Rear Taillamp and Stoplamp 3057Rear Taillamp in Bumper 3057Rear Turn Signal Lamp 3156Roof Marker Lamp 168

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact yourdealer.

5-50

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected at leasttwice a year for wear and cracking. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-4 for more information.

Replacement blades come in different types and areremoved in different ways. For proper type and length,see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts onpage 6-13.

To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly do thefollowing:

1. Lift the wiper arm and turn the blade until it isfacing away from the windshield. 2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly

toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.

3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.

5-51

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made bya leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questionsabout your tire warranty and where to obtain service,see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additionalinformation refer to the tire manufacturer’s bookletincluded with your vehicle’s Owner Manual.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly used tiresare dangerous.

• Overloading your tires can causeoverheating as a result of too muchfriction. You could have an air-out and aserious accident. See Loading YourVehicle on page 4-58.



• Underinflated tires pose the same dangeras overloaded tires. The resulting accidentcould cause serious injury. Check all tiresfrequently to maintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressure should be checkedwhen your tires are cold. See Inflation -Tire Pressure on page 5-58.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut,punctured or broken by a suddenimpact —such as when you hit a pothole.Keep tires at the recommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. Ifyour tread is badly worn, or if your tireshave been damaged, replace them.

5-52

Tire Sidewall LabellingUseful information about a tire is molded into thesidewall. The following illustrations are examples of atypical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type andservice description. See the “Tire Size” illustrationlater in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designed toGM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPCspecification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPCspecifications meet or exceed all federal safetyguidelines.(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters andnumbers following DOT code are the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer andplant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, althoughonly one side may have the date of manufacture.(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number ofplies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear, traction andtemperature resistance. For more information, seeUniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-62.(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximumload that can be carried and the maximum pressureneeded to support that load. For information onrecommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 5-58 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-58.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

5-53

(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type andservice description. See the “Tire Size” illustrationlater in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designed toGM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC

specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPCspecifications meet or exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that canbe carried and the maximum pressure needed tosupport that load when used in a dual configuration. Forinformation on recommended tire pressure seeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-58 and Loading YourVehicle on page 4-58.

(D) DOT (Department of Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters andnumbers following DOT code are the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer andplant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, althoughonly one side may have the date of manufacture.

(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number ofplies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load thatcan be carried and the maximum pressure neededto support that load when used as a single. Forinformation on recommended tire pressure see Inflation- Tire Pressure on page 5-58 and Loading YourVehicle on page 4-58.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

5-54

Tire SizeThe following examples show the different parts of atire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as thefirst character in the tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizing system. The letters LT asthe first two characters in the tire size means a lighttruck tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates thetire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicatesthe tire height-to-width measurements. For example, ifthe tire size aspect ratio is 75, as shown in item C of thelight truck (LT-Metric) tire illustration, it would meanthat the tire’s sidewall is 75% as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letterR means radial ply construction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B meansbelted-bias ply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: The service descriptionindicates the load range and speed rating of a tire. Theload index can range from 1 to 279. Speed ratingsrange from A to Z.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

5-55

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressureis expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) orkilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combined weightof optional accessories. Some examples of optionalaccessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,power brakes, power windows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height toits width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is locatedbetween the plies and the tread. Cords may be madefrom steel or other reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped bysteel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies arelaid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.

Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure ina tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) orkilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-58.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipment includingthe maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, butwithout passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of atire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehiclesafety standards. The DOT code includes the TireIdentification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designatorwhich can also identify the tire manufacturer, productionplant, brand and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see LoadingYour Vehicle on page 4-58.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the frontaxle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-58.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-58.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outward whenmounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light dutytrucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.

5-56

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacityof a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. Themaximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curbweight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants avehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-58.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tirethat contains a whitewall, bears white lettering orbears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name moldingthat is higher or deeper than the same moldings onthe other sidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passengercars and some light duty trucks and multipurposevehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure andshown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 5-58 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-58.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cordsthat extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tirebeads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread andthe bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to atire indicating the maximum speed at which a tirecan operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and the roadsurface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contactwith the road.

5-57

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tirewhen only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-61.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): Atire information system that provides consumers withratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear.Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings are moldedinto the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 5-62.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designatedseating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plusthe rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicleon page 4-58.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to avehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight andthe original equipment tire size and recommendedinflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading InformationLabel” under Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-58.

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),you can get the following:

• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), youcan get the following:

• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

5-58

A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to thevehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’sdoor latch. This label shows your vehicle’s originalequipment tires and the correct inflation pressures foryour tires when they are cold. The recommendedcold tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is theminimum amount of air pressure needed to support yourvehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how much weightyour vehicle can carry, and an example of the tireand loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicleon page 4-58. How you load your vehicle affectsvehicle handling and ride comfort, never load yourvehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more.

Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflatedsimply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properlyinflated even when they’re underinflated. Check the tire’sinflation pressure when the tires are cold. Cold meansyour vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours ordriven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Pressthe tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressuremeasurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matchesthe recommended pressure on the tire and loadinginformation label, no further adjustment is necessary. Ifthe pressure is low, add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on themetal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck thetire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt andmoisture.

Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires assoon as possible and check wheel alignment. Alsocheck for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Timefor New Tires on page 5-61 and Wheel Replacementon page 5-64 for more information.

5-59

Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull,and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves,use the ratchet/wheel wrench to tighten the cable. SeeChanging a Flat Tire on page 5-68.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotationis the most important. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-4.

When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotationpattern shown here.

Do not include the spare tire in your tire rotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front andrear inflation pressures as shown on the tire and loadinginformation label. See Loading Your Vehicle onpage 4-58 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-58,for more information. Make certain that all wheelnuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque”under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-110.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. When youchange a wheel, remove any rust or dirt fromplaces where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency, you can use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure to use ascraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get allthe rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire onpage 5-68.

5-60

When It Is Time for New Tires

One way to tell when it’stime for new tires is tocheck the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining. Somecommercial truck tires maynot have treadwearindicators.

You need a new tire if any of the following statementsare true:• You can see the indicators at three or more places

around the tire.• You can see cord or fabric showing through the

tire’s rubber.• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged

deep enough to show cord or fabric.• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that

can’t be repaired well because of the size orlocation of the damage.

Buying New TiresTo find out what kind and size of tires you need, look atthe Certification/Tire label or the Tire and LoadingInformation label. For examples of these labels and theirlocation on your vehicle, see Loading Your Vehicle onpage 4-58.

The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new hada Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,General Motors recommends that you get tires withthat same TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle willcontinue to have tires that are designed to give properendurance, handling, speed rating, load range, traction,ride and other things during normal service on yourvehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread design, theTPC number will be followed by an “MS” (for mudand snow).

5-61

If you replace your tires with those not having a TPCSpec number, make sure they are the same size, loadrange, speed rating and construction type (bias,bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to lose controlwhile driving. If you mix tires of different sizesor types (radial and bias-belted tires) thevehicle may not handle properly, and youcould have a crash. Using tires of differentsizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.Be sure to use the same size and type tires onall wheels.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, thewheel rim flanges could develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tire and/or wheelcould fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use onlyradial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable on thetire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximumsection width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration, which grades tires bytreadwear, traction and temperature performance. (Thisapplies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)The grades are molded on the sidewalls of mostpassenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Gradingsystem does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motors passengercars and light trucks may vary with respect to thesegrades, they must also conform to federal safetyrequirements and additional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) standards.

5-62

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rating based onthe wear rate of the tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified government test course.For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one anda half (1.5) times as well on the government course asa tire graded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits, service practices anddifferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s abilityto stop on wet pavement as measured under controlledconditions on specified government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance. Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistance to the generationof heat and its ability to dissipate heat when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can

cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a levelof performance which all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, orexcessive loading, either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give you thelongest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing willnot be necessary on a regular basis. However, ifyou notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling toone side or the other, the alignment may need tobe checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating whendriving on a smooth road, your tires and wheelsmay need to be rebalanced. See your dealer for properdiagnosis.

5-63

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rustedor corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, thewheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except somealuminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the same load-carryingcapacity, diameter, width, offset and be mountedthe same way as the one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel boltsor wheel nuts, replace them only with new GMoriginal equipment parts. This way, you will be sure tohave the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nutsfor your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheelbolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can bedangerous. It could affect the braking andhandling of your vehicle, make your tires loseair and make you lose control. You could havea collision in which you or others could beinjured. Always use the correct wheel, wheelbolts and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problemswith bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chainclearance to the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-68 for moreinformation.

5-64

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You can’t know how it’s been usedor how far it’s been driven. It could failsuddenly and cause a crash. If you have toreplace a wheel, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.

Tire ChainsNotice: Use tire chains only where legal and onlywhen you must. Use only SAE Class U-typechains that are the proper size for your tires. Installthem on the rear axle tires and tighten them astightly as possible with the ends securely fastened.Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’sinstructions. If you can hear the chains contactingyour vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contactcontinues, slow down until it stops. Driving toofast or spinning the wheels with chains on willdamage your vehicle.

Accessory InflatorYour vehicle may have an accessory inflator system.You can inflate things like basketballs and bicycle tires.You can also use it to bring your tire pressure up tothe proper pressure. The engine must be running andthe gearshift lever must be in PARK (P) for the inflator tooperate.

The accessory inflator islocated in the rearcompartment on thepassenger’s side of thevehicle.

5-65

The accessory inflator kitis located in the spare tirecover pocket. The kitincludes a hose and threenozzle adapters.

To use the accessory inflator, do the following:

1. Attach the appropriate nozzle adapter to the end ofthe hose.

2. Attach that end of the hose to the object you wishto inflate.

3. Remove the dust cover and attach the hose to theoutlet.

The accessory inflator hose also has a built-in airpressure gage. As soon as you start to inflatean object it will automatically read the currentpressure.

4. Press and release the switch to turn the accessoryinflator on. The indicator light will remain on whilethe inflator is running.

When you are finished using the inflator, press andrelease the switch to turn it off. Place the inflator kit toolsand the hose in the pouch and store it back in thespare tire cover pocket.

5-66

If your vehicle is equipped with the air suspensionsystem, load leveling will not function with the inflatorhose attached to the inflator outlet.

{CAUTION:

Inflating something too much can make itexplode, and you or others could be injured.Be sure to read the inflator instructions, andinflate any object only to its recommendedpressure.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you’re driving,especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goesout of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly.But if you should ever have a blowout, here are afew tips about what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag thatpulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake toa stop well out of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like askid and may require the same correction you would;use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot fromthe accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under controlby steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It maybe very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gentlybrake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerous withoutthe appropriate safety equipment and training.The jack provided with your vehicle isdesigned only for changing a flat tire. If it isused for anything else, you or others could bebadly injured or killed if the vehicle slips offthe jack. Use the jack provided with yourvehicle only for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use yourjacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

5-67

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damageby driving slowly to a level place. Turn on yourhazard warning flashers.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehiclecan slip off the jack and roll over or fall on youor other people. You and they could be badlyinjured or even killed. Find a level place tochange your tire. To help prevent the vehiclefrom moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).



3. Be sure the transfer case is in a drivegear—not in NEUTRAL.

4. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

5. Do not allow passengers to remain in thevehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle will notmove, you can put blocks at the front and rearof the tire farthest away from the one beingchanged. That would be the tire on the otherside, at the opposite end of the vehicle.

5-68

When you have a flat tire, use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks.

The following steps will tell you next how to use the jackand change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools

Removing the ToolsSUVThe equipment you will need is in a tool bag locatedbehind and to the side of the driver’s side second rowseat. To remove the equipment, do the following:

1. Fold the driver’s side second row seat down. See60/40 Split Bench Seat on page 1-7 for moreinformation.

2. Turn the wing nut (A)counterclockwise torelease the jack.

3. Turn the wing nut (B), which holds the jack tool kit,counterclockwise to release it.

5-69

4. Open the tool bag. You will find the following toolsneeded to remove the spare tire and flat tire:

A. Jack HandleB. Jack Handle

Extension (Usedfor RearFlats Only)

C. Wheel WrenchD. RatchetE. Spanner Wrench

SUT

The equipment you will need is the rear cargocompartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.Unlock the cover and pull it off.

5-70

You will first need to remove the tool kit/first aid kit toallow you enough room to remove the tire changingequipment.

Once removed, you will see the following tire changingequipment:

A. Tool BagB. JackC. Jack Wing Nut

D. Wheel BlocksWing Nut

E. Wheel Blocks

To remove the equipment, do the following:

1. Unscrew the wing nut holding the wheel blocks andremove them.

2. Unscrew the wing nut holding the jack andremove it.

5-71

3. Pull the tool bag up and out from the frontretention clip.

4. Open the tool bag. You will find the following toolsneeded to remove the spare tire and change aflat tire:

A. Jack HandleB. Jack Handle

Extension (Usedfor RearFlats Only)

C. Wheel WrenchD. Ratchet

5-72

Removing the Inside-MountedSpare TireThe spare tire and wheel blocks are stored in the rearcargo area. You will need to remove the tire cover to getto them.

A. Spare or Flat TireB. Receiver Extension (If Equipped) Not used for tire

changing procedure. See “Receiver Extension” underIf Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice orSnow on page 4-52.

C. Tire Retainer PlateD. NutE. Wheel Blocks

1. Remove the wheel blocks from the tire retainerplate by turning the wing nut counterclockwise.

2. Place the flat end of the wheel wrench through thehole in the spanner wrench.

5-73

3. Place the end of thespanner wrench on thenut and then turnthe wheel wrenchcounterclockwise toloosen the nut holdingthe tire to thecarrier.

4. Pull off the tire retainer plate and set it aside.Remove the spare tire from the wheel carrier.

5. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.

The tools you will be using to finish changing a flat tireare the following:

A. JackB. Wheel BlocksC. Jack Handle

D. Jack HandleExtension

E. Wheel WrenchF. Ratchet

Before proceeding, be sure to set the wheel blocks atthe appropriate tires as shown previously.

5-74

Removing theSpare-Tire-Carrier-Mounted Spare TireThe outside-mounted spare tire is attached to thetire carrier. To remove the spare tire, do the following:

1. Open the tire carrier. See Tailgate (SUT) onpage 2-14 for tire carrier operation.

2. Unscrew the wing nut on the back of the tire carrier.

3. Pull off the license plate holder from the spare tire.

4. Slide the ratchet onto the wheel wrench with theDOWN mark facing you.

5-75

5. Turn the ratchet counterclockwise to loosen thewheel nuts.

6. Remove the three wheel nuts holding the spare tireonto the tire carrier.

7. Pull off and carefully lower the spare tire to theground. Set it next to the flat tire.

The tools you will be using to finish changing a flat tireinclude the following:

A. JackB. Wheel BlocksC. Jack Handle

D. Jack HandleExtension

E. Wheel WrenchF. Ratchet

Before proceeding, be sure to set the wheel blocks atthe appropriate tires as shown previously.

5-76

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. To remove the centercap, place the flat endof the wheel wrenchin the slot on the wheeland carefully pry thecenter cap out.

2. Slide the ratchet onto the wheel wrench with theDOWN mark facing you.

3. Turn the ratchet counterclockwise to loosen thewheel nuts. Do not remove them yet.You will now need to jack the vehicle up using thefollowing instructions.

5-77

4. Assemble the jack and tools as follows:

Front Flat Tire: Attach the jack handle with thehook end connected to the u-hook/clevis onthe jack. Slide the ratchet onto the jack handle withthe UP mark facing you.

Rear Flat Tire: Assemble the jack together with thejack handle and the jack handle extension. Pressthe retention clip on the jack handle extension(arrow) so it engages into the jack handle. Slide theratchet onto the jack handle extension with theUP mark facing you.

5-78

5. Turn the ratchet clockwise to raise the jack head tothe lifting point.

Front Flat Tire: Positionthe jack under the vehicleon the frame behindthe flat tire where theframe sections overlap.See the following graphicfor an approximatemeasurement of the jacklocation on the frame.

Front Flat TireX = 28.5 inches (72.0 cm)

5-79

Rear Flat Tire: Place thejack under the curved rearaxle pad. Make surethe jack head is positionedso that the rear axlepad is resting securely onthe jack head.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up isdangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack youcould be badly injured or killed. Never getunder a vehicle when it is supported onlyby a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperlypositioned can damage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To help avoid personalinjury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit thejack lift head into the proper location beforeraising the vehicle.

6. Turn the ratchet clockwise to raise the vehicle.Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground sothere is enough room for the spare tire to clear theground.

Rear Flat Tire

5-80

7. Remove all the wheelnuts and take off theflat tire.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make the wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. When youchange a wheel, remove any rust or dirt fromthe places where the wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, you can use a clothor a paper towel to do this; but be sure to usea scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, toget all the rust or dirt off.

8. Remove any rust or dirtfrom the wheel bolts,mounting surfacesand spare wheel.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. Ifyou do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheelcould fall off, causing a serious accident.

9. Install the spare tire.

10. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end ofthe nuts toward the wheel.

5-81

11. Tighten each wheel nut by hand. Then use theratchet/wheel wrench to tighten the nuts, withthe UP mark facing you, clockwise until the wheel isheld against the hub.You will not be tightening the nuts fully yet.

12. Lower the vehicle by turning the ratchetcounterclockwise, with the DOWN mark facing you.Then lower the jack completely.

Front Position Rear Position

5-82

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightenedwheel nuts can cause the wheel to come looseand even come off. This could lead to anaccident. Be sure to use the correct wheelnuts. If you have to replace them, be sure toget new GM original equipment wheel nuts.Stop somewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrench to theproper torque specification. See Capacitiesand Specifications on page 5-110 for wheel nuttorque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can leadto brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoidexpensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheelnuts in the proper sequence and to the propertorque specification. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 5-110 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

13. Tighten the nuts firmlyin a crisscrosssequence as shown byturning the ratchetclockwise, with the UPmark facing you.

14. When you install the wheel and tire, you must alsoreinstall the center cap. Place the cap on the wheeland tap it into place until it sits flush with the wheel.

5-83

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

Inside-Mounted TireUse the following art and text to help you store the spareor flat tire back into its proper spot when you are done.

Store the flat or spare tire back inside the vehicle on thespare tire mount.

A. Spare or Flat TireB. Receiver Extension

(If Equipped)

C. Tire Retainer PlateD. NutE. Wheel Blocks

To store the flat or spare tire on the spare tire mount,do the following:

1. Slide the flat or spare tire onto the tire carrier.

2. Slide the tire retainer plate into the wheel opening.Be sure that the stud attached to the tire carrierpasses through the hole in the tire retainer plate.

3. Tighten the nut by hand until the tire retainer plateis snug against the tire.

4. Use the wheel wrenchand spanner to tightenthe nut firmly. Try tomove the tire back andforth slightly to besure it is secure.

5. Reattach the wheel blocks to the tire retainer plateand tighten the wing nut.

6. Reinstall the tire cover onto the spare or flat tire.

5-84

Spare-Tire-Carrier-Mounted TireTo store the flat or spare tire on the tire carrier, do thefollowing:

1. Close the tire carrier. See Tailgate (SUT) onpage 2-14 for tire carrier operation.

2. Place the flat or spare tire onto the tire carrier withthe outside of the wheel facing you.

3. Reinstall the three nuts holding spare or flat tire tothe tire carrier. Tighten the nuts by hand.

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightenedwheel nuts can cause the wheel to come looseand even come off. This could lead to anaccident. Be sure to use the correct wheelnuts. If you have to replace them, be sure toget new GM original equipment wheel nuts.Stop somewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrench to theproper torque specification. See Capacitiesand Specifications on page 5-110 for wheel nuttorque specification.

4. Use the ratchet and wheel wrench to tighten thenuts firmly. Try to move the tire back and forthslightly to be sure it is secure.

5-85

5. Slide the license plate holder onto the spare or flattire. Secure it from the back of the tire carrier withthe wing nut.If you choose not to reinstall the spare or flat tire onthe vehicle, you will still need to reinstall thelicense plate holder on the spare tire carrier.

Storing the ToolsSUVFollow these instructions to store the jack and tools:

1. Lower the jack completely.2. Place the jack in the mounting bracket.

3. Tighten the wing nut(A) until the jack issecurely fastened.

4. Place the tools in the bag.5. Slide the securing clip over the bag and secure the

bag to the floor by tightening the wing nut (B) to thestud coming out of the floor.In order to reduce the potential of the jacksqueaking or rattling, you will need to preload thejack so it fits tightly in the mounting bracket.To do this, turn the u-hook/clevis at the top of thejack clockwise until the jack is held tight in themounting bracket.

5-86

SUTFollow these instructions to store the jack and tools:

1. Lower the jack completely.

2. Place the jack (B) in the mounting bracket in therear cargo compartment.

3. Tighten the wing nut (C) until the jack is securelyfastened.In order to reduce the potential of the jacksqueaking or rattling, you will need to preload thejack so it fits tightly in the mounting bracket.To do this, turn the u-hook/clevis at the top of thejack clockwise until the jack is held tight in themounting bracket.

4. Place the wheel blocks (E) onto the mounting studand tighten the wing nut (D) to secure them.

5. Place the tools in the tool bag (A), roll the bagtogether tightly and neatly and then close it withthe hook and loop fasteners.If you do not roll the tool bag tightly and neatly, youwill have trouble getting it back into the storageretention clips in the next step.

5-87

6. Slide the tool bag into the rear retention clip. It mayhelp to twist the tool bag as you slide it into the rearretention clip.

7. Push the front of the tool bag down into the frontretention clip.

5-88

8. Replace the jack cover. Be sure the tabs on theback of the jack cover fit into the slots on thecargo box before closing the jack cover.

9. Close the spare tire carrier to ensure it securelylatches. See Tailgate (SUT) on page 2-14 for tirecarrier operation.

Spare TireYour vehicle, when new, had a fully inflated spare tire.A spare tire may lose air over time, so check itsinflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 5-58 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-58for information regarding proper tire inflation and loadingyour vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, installor store a spare tire, see Changing a Flat Tire onpage 5-68 and Removing the Flat Tire and Installing theSpare Tire on page 5-77.

After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you shouldstop as soon as possible and make sure the spare iscorrectly inflated. Have the damaged or flat roadtire repaired or replaced as soon as you can andinstalled back onto your vehicle. This way, a spare tirewill be available in case you need it again.

Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire thanthe road tires—those originally installed on your vehicle.This spare tires was developed for use on yourvehicle, so it’s all right to drive on it.

If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not match yourvehicle’s original road tires and wheels in size andtype, do not include the spare in the tire rotation.

5-89

Appearance CareCleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic.Other cleaning products can burst into flames if a matchis struck near them or if they get on a hot part of thevehicle. Some are dangerous if their fumes are inhaledin an enclosed space. When anything from a containeris used to clean the vehicle, be sure to follow themanufacturer’s warnings and instructions. Always openthe doors or windows of the vehicle when cleaningthe inside.

Never use these to clean the vehicle:

• Benzene

• Naphtha

• Carbon Tetrachloride

• Acetone

• Paint Thinner

• Turpentine

• Lacquer Thinner

• Nail Polish Remover

They can all be hazardous — some more thanothers —and they can all damage the vehicle, too.

Do not use any of these products unless this manualsays you can. In many uses, these will damagethe vehicle:

• Alcohol

• Laundry Soap

• Bleach

• Reducing Agents

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best ifit is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust anddirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt candamage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces.Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particlesfrom your upholstery. It is important to keep yourupholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Yourvehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heatthat could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers and garmentsthat transfer color to your home furnishings may alsotransfer color to your vehicle’s interior.

5-90

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleanersspecifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.Permanent damage may result from using cleaners onsurfaces for which they were not intended. Use glasscleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-sprayfrom other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaningglass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratchthe glass and/or cause damage to the rear windowdefogger. When cleaning the glass on yourvehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Beforeusing cleaners, read and adhere to all safetyinstructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’sinterior, maintain adequate ventilation by openingyour vehicle’s doors and windows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobsusing a small brush with soft bristles.

Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you canalso obtain a product from your GM dealer to removeodors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleanersor techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage toyour vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressivelywith a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressurecan damage your interior and does not improve theeffectiveness of soil removal.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundrydetergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.Using too much soap will leave a residue thatleaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is agood guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result fromthe use of many organic solvents such as naptha,alcohol, etc.

5-91

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachmentfrequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canistervacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be usedon floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils, alwaystry to remove them first with plain water or club soda.Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil aspossible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a papertowel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper toweluntil no more can be removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible andthen vacuum.

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water orclub soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rubtoward the center. Continue cleaning, using a cleanarea of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mildsoap solution and repeat the cleaning processthat was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner orspot lifter may be necessary. When a commercialupholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test asmall hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locallycleaned area gives any impression that a ring formationmay result, clean the entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, a papertowel can be used to blot excess moisture from thefabric or carpet.

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution canbe used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not useheat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Neveruse spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Manycommercial leather cleaners and coatings that are soldto preserve and protect leather may permanentlychange the appearance and feel of your leather and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-basedproducts, or those containing organic solvents to cleanyour vehicle’s interior because they can alter theappearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniformmanner. Never use shoe polish on your leather.

5-92

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solutioncan be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never usespot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Manycommercial cleaners and coatings that are sold topreserve and protect soft plastic surfaces maypermanently change the appearance and feel of yourinterior and are not recommended. Do not use siliconeor wax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss ina non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss on yourinstrument panel. The increase in gloss may causeannoying reflections in the windshield and even make itdifficult to see through the windshield under certainconditions.

Wood PanelsUse a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water (usemild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediatelywith a clean cloth.

Speaker CoversVacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that thespeaker will not be damaged. Clean spots withjust water and mild soap.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, itmay severely weaken them. In a crash, theymight not be able to provide adequateprotection. Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,damp weather frequent application may be required. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

5-93

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth ofcolor, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep itclean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soapsor chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,removing all soap residue completely. GM-approvedcleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-98. Donot use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agentsshould be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on thesurface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surfacescratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water to enter thevehicle.

The overall height, width, and underbody clearances ofthe HUMMER H2 are similar to current GeneralMotors’ full-size light duty trucks. This means aHUMMER H2 should fit in a standard car wash. But, ifyour vehicle has added accessories like roof-mountedlamps or a roof basket, it might not fit properly in astandard car wash.

Notice: Certain add-on accessories can change thedimensions of your vehicle. If you’ve added itemsto the outside of your vehicle, it might not fitproperly in a standard car wash. Your vehicle andthe car wash could be damaged. To help preventdamage, know how accessories have changed thedimensions of your vehicle and check with thecar wash manager before entering a car wash.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that does not have enoughclearance for any roof-mounted accessories (suchas off-road lamps or a roof basket) on your vehicle,you can damage your vehicle. To avoid damagingyour vehicle in a car wash, remove anyroof-mounted accessories if you can, and do notuse an automatic car wash while roof-mountedaccessories are on your vehicle. See Power WinchPlatform on page 4-57 and Off-Road Lamps onpage 3-17 for more information.

Also see Luggage Carrier on page 2-52 for moreinformation.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a carwashing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle onpage 5-94.

5-94

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle byhand may be necessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. GM-approved cleaning products can beobtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 5-98.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish maydamage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes andpolishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoatpaint finish on your vehicle.

The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. Theclearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the coloredbasecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and othersalts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, birddroppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on paintedsurfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. Ifnecessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are markedsafe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather,and chemical fallout that can take their toll over aperiod of years. To help keep the paint finish lookingnew, keep the vehicle in a garage or covered wheneverpossible.

Windshield, Backglass, and WiperBladesIf the windshield is not clear after using the windshieldwasher, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,wax, sap or other material may be on the blade orwindshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strengthglass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads donot form when you rinse it with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper bladesand affect their performance. Clean the blade bywiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strengthwindshield washer solvent. Then rinse the bladewith water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;replace blades that look worn.

5-95

Aluminum WheelsNotice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum or chrome-platedwheels, you could damage the surface of thewheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners onaluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mildsoap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsingthoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may thenbe applied.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheelscould damage the wheels. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish onchrome wheels only.

The surface of these wheels is similar to the paintedsurface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes onthem because the surface could be damaged. Do notuse chrome polish on aluminum wheels.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminumor chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicleequipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheelsthrough an automatic car wash that uses siliconecarbide tire cleaning brushes.

Do not take the vehicle through an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. Thesebrushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,always wipe off any overspray from all paintedsurfaces on your vehicle.

5-96

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the body repair shopapplies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide thecorrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in thefinish should be repaired right away. Bare metalwill corrode quickly and may develop into major repairexpense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-upmaterials available from your GM dealer. Larger areasof finish damage can be corrected in your GMdealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal and dustcontrol can collect on the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust can develop on theunderbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even though they have corrosionprotection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mudand debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas ofthe frame should be loosened before being flushed.Your dealer or an underbody car washing system cando this for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions can create achemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon andattack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage cantake two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,and small, irregular dark spots etched into thepaint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM willrepair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces ofnew vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,whichever occurs first.

5-97

Vehicle Care/Appearance MaterialsSee your GM dealer for more information on purchasingthe following products.

Description UsagePolishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and Road OilRemover

Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.

Chrome Cleaner andPolish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White Sidewall TireCleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and Wire WheelCleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onand wipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches, and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire Shine LowGloss

Cleans, shines, andprotects in one step. Nowiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly removes spotsand stains from carpets,vinyl, and clothupholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

See your General Motors parts department for theseproducts. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 6-12.

5-98

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears ona plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, onthe driver’s side. You can see it if you look through thewindshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN alsoappears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Partslabels and the certificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in your VIN is the engine code.This code will help you identify your engine,specifications and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelYou will find this label on the inside of the glove box. Itis very helpful if you ever need to order parts. Onthis label, you will find the following:

• VIN

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.

5-99

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical EquipmentNotice: Don’t add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicleand the damage wouldn’t be covered by yourwarranty. Some add-on electrical equipment cankeep other components from working as theyshould.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting toadd anything electrical to your vehicle, see ServicingYour Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-68.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by an internalcircuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due toheavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motorcools. If the overload is caused by some electricalproblem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsCircuit breakers protect the power windows and otherpower accessories. When the current load is too heavy,the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting thecircuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.

5-100

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected fromshort circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakersand fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces thechance of fires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If theband is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure youreplace a bad fuse with a new one of the identicalsize and rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t havea spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the sameamperage. Just pick some feature of your vehiclethat you can get along without – like the radio orcigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correctamperage. Replace it as soon as you can.

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

The fuse block accessdoor is located on thedriver’s side edge of theinstrument panel. Pulloff the cover to access thefuse block.

To remove fuses if you don’t have a fuse extractor, holdthe end of the fuse between your thumb and indexfinger and pull straight out.

You may have spare fuses located behind the fuseblock access door. These can be used to replace a badfuse. However, make sure it is of the correct amperage.

5-101

Fuses Usage

RR Wiper Rear Window Wiper Switch

SEO ACCY Special Equipment OptionAccessory

WS WPR Windshield Wipers

Fuses Usage

TBC ACCY Truck Body ControllerAccessory

IGN 3 Rear Heated Seats Module

4WD Four-Wheel Drive Switch, AirSuspension Switch/Module

HTR A/C Not Used

LOCK Power Door Lock Relay(Lock Function)

HVAC 1 Inside Rearview Mirror,Climate Control System

L DOOR Driver’s Door HarnessConnection

CRUISE Cruise Control

UNLOCK Power Door Lock Relay(Unlock Function)

RR FOG LP Not Used

BRAKE Brake Switch

5-102

Fuses Usage

DRIVER UNLOCKPower Door Lock Relay(Driver’s Door UnlockFunction)

IGN 0Brake Transmission ShiftInterlock, Powertrain ControlModule, Transmission

TBC IGN 0 Truck Body Controller

VEH CHMSL Vehicle and Trailer HighMounted Stoplamp

LT TRLR ST/TRN Left Turn Signal/Stop Trailer

LT TRN Left Turn Signals andSidemarkers

VEH STOPVehicle Stoplamps, BrakeModule, Electronic ThrottleControl Module

RT TRLR ST/TRN Right Turn Signal/Stop Trailer

RT TRN Right Turn Signals andSidemarkers

Fuses Usage

BODY Harness Connector

DDM Driver Door Module

LOCKS Rear Doors and LiftgatePower Lock Relay Feed

ECC Liftgate

TBC 2C Truck Body Controller

FLASH Flasher Module

CB LT DOORSLeft Rear Power WindowCircuit Breaker and DriverDoor Module

TBC 2B Truck Body Controller

TBC 2A Truck Body Controller

Circuit Breaker UsageAUX PWR 2 Midgate Controller (SUT Only)

5-103

Center Instrument Panel Fuse BlockThe center instrument panel utility block is locatedunderneath the instrument panel, to the left of thesteering column.

Device Usage

SEOSpecial EquipmentOption/Off-road LampsHarness Connector

TRAILER Trailer Brake WiringUPFIT Upfitter (Not Used)SL RIDE Ride Control (Not Used)HDLR 2 Headliner Wiring Connector 2BODY Body Wiring ConnectorDEFOG Rear Defogger RelayHDLNR 1 Headliner Wiring Connector 1SPARE RELAY Not Used

CB SEAT Driver and Passenger SeatModule Circuit Breaker

CB RT DOOR Rear Right Power Window,Passenger Door Module

SPARE Not UsedINFO Not Used

5-104

Underhood Fuse Block The underhood fuse block in the engine compartment islocated on the driver’s side of the vehicle near thebattery. Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block.

To remove fuses if you don’t have a fuse extractor,hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and indexfinger and pull straight out.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 formore information on its location.

5-105

Fuses Usage

GLOW PLUG Not Used

CUST FEED Gasoline Accessory Power

HYBRID Hybrid (If Equipped)

STUD #1 Accessory Power/TrailerWiring

MBEC 1Mid Bussed Electrical CenterPower Feed, Front Seats,Right Doors

BLOWER Front Climate Control Fan

LBEC 2

Left Bussed Electrical Center,Door Modules, Door Locks,Auxiliary Power Outlet—RearCargo Area and InstrumentPanel

STUD #2 Accessory Power/TrailerWiring Brake Feed

ABS Anti-Lock Brakes

VSES/ECAS Electronically Controlled AirSuspension

IGN A Ignition Switch

IGN B Ignition Switch

Fuses Usage

LBEC 1Left Bussed Electrical Center,Left Doors, Truck BodyController, Flasher Module

TRL PARK Parking Lamps Trailer Wiring

RR PARK Right Rear Parking andSidemarker Lamps

LR PARK Left Rear Parking andSidemarker Lamps

PARK LP Parking Lamps Relay

STRTR Starter Relay

INTPARK Roof Marker Lamps

STOP LP Stoplamps

TBC BATT Truck Body Controller BatteryFeed

S/ROOF Not Used

SEO B2 Off-Road Lamps

4WS Vent Solenoid Canister

RR HVAC Sunroof

5-107

Fuses Usage

AUX PWRInstrument Panel Outlets,Rear Cargo Area PowerOutlets, Console

IGN 1 PCM Ignition

PCM 1 Powertrain Control Module

ETC/ECM Electronic Throttle Control,Electronic Brake Controller

INJ 1 Ignition Coil, FuelInjectors-Bank 1

INJ 2 Ignition Coil, FuelInjectors-Bank 2

IGN E

Instrument Panel Cluster, AirConditioning Relay, TurnSignal/Hazard Switch, StarterRelay, Electronic BrakeController TC2 Mode Switch

RTD Electronic Brake ControllerBattery Feed

TRL B/U Backup Lamps Trailer Wiring

PCM B Powertrain Control Module,Fuel Pump

F/PMP Fuel Pump (Relay)

Fuses Usage

02A Oxygen Sensors

B/U LPBack-up Lamps, AutomaticTransmission Shift LockControl System

RR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger

HDLP-HI Headlamp High Beam Relay

PRIME Not Used

O2B Oxygen Sensors

AIRBAG Supplemental InflatableRestraint System

FRT PARK Front Parking Lamps,Sidemarker Lamps

DRL Daytime Running Lamps(Relay)

SEO IGN Rear Defog Relay

TBC IGN1 Truck Body Controller Ignition

HI HDLP-LT High Beam Headlamp-Left

LH HID Not Used

DRL Daytime Running Lamps

RVC Regulated Voltage Control

5-108

Fuses Usage

IPC/DICInstrument PanelCluster/Driver InformationCenter

HVAC/ECASClimate ControlController/ElectronicallyControlled Air Suspension

CIG LTR Cigarette Lighter

HI HDLP-RT High Beam Headlamp-Right

HDLP-LOW Headlamp Low Beam Relay

A/C COMP Air Conditioning CompressorRelay

A/C COMP Air Conditioning Compressor

RR WPR Rear Wiper/Washer

RADIO Audio System

SEO B1Mid Bussed Electrical Center,HomeLink, Rear HeatedSeats

LO HDLP-LT Headlamp Low Beam-Left

BTSI Brake Transmission ShiftInterlock System

Fuses Usage

CRNK Starting System

LO HDLP-RT Headlamp Low Beam-Right

FOG LP Not Used

FOG LP Not Used

HORN Horn Relay

W/S WASH Windshield and Rear WindowWasher Pump Relay

W/S WASH Windshield and Rear WindowWasher Pump

INFO OnStar

RADIO AMP Radio Amplifier

RH HID Not Used

HORN Horn

EAP Not Used

TREC All-Wheel Drive Module

SBA Not Used

5-109

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric. Please refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-12 for more information.

Capacities and Specifications

Application

Capacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R-134a 1.6 lbs 0.7 kg

Cooling SystemAfter refill, the level must be rechecked. See CoolingSystem on page 5-29.

13.0 quarts 12.7 L

Engine Oil with FilterAfter refill, the level must be rechecked. Add enough engineoil so that the fluid is within the proper operating range. SeeEngine Oil on page 5-13.

6.0 quarts 5.7 L

Fuel Tank 32.0 gallons 121.0 L

Wheel Nut Torque 140 lb ft 190 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in thismanual.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

VORTEC™ 6000 V8 U Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)

5-110

Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2Introduction ...................................................6-2Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-3Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4Additional Required Services ............................6-6Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7

Owner Checks and Services ............................6-9At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-9At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9At Least Once a Year ...................................6-10Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-13Maintenance Record .....................................6-14

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

6-1

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper level andchange as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plansupplements your new vehicle warranties. See yourWarranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealerfor details.

Maintenance RequirementsNotice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,replacement parts, and recommended fluids andlubricants as prescribed in this manual arenecessary to keep your vehicle in good workingcondition. Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance may not be covered bywarranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep yourvehicle in good working condition, but also helps theenvironment. All recommended maintenance isimportant. Improper vehicle maintenance can evenaffect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluidlevels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level ofemissions from your vehicle. To help protect ourenvironment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.

6-2

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we do not knowexactly how you will drive it. You may drive veryshort distances only a few times a week. Or you maydrive long distances all the time in very hot, dustyweather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in manyother ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need morefrequent checks and replacements. So please readthe following and note how you drive. If you have anyquestions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo within recommendedlimits. You will find these limits on the tire andloading information label. See Loading Your Vehicleon page 4-58.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legaldriving limits.

• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.See Off-Road Driving on page 4-16.

• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octaneon page 5-5.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4should be performed when indicated. See AdditionalRequired Services on page 6-6 and MaintenanceFootnotes on page 6-7 for further information.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle canbe dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, youcan be seriously injured. Do your ownmaintenance work only if you have therequired know-how and the proper tools andequipment for the job. If you have any doubt,see your GM Goodwrench ® dealer to have aqualified technician do the work.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So,unless you are technically qualified and have thenecessary equipment, you should have your GMGoodwrench® dealer do these jobs.

When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for yourservice needs, you will know that GM-trained andsupported service technicians will perform the workusing genuine GM parts.

If you want to purchase service information, see ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 7-11.

6-3

Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 tells you whatshould be checked, when to check it and what youcan easily do to help keep your vehicle in goodcondition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants touse are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 6-12 and Normal Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced,make sure these are used. All parts should be replacedand all necessary repairs done before you or anyoneelse drives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine GM parts.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) comes on, it means thatservice is required for your vehicle. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 3-47. Have your vehicleserviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are drivingunder the best conditions, the engine oil life system maynot indicate that vehicle service is necessary for overa year. However, your engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and at this time the systemmust be reset. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer hasGM-trained service technicians who will perform thiswork using genuine GM parts and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to resetthe oil life system whenever the oil is changed. SeeEngine Oil Life System on page 5-16 for information onthe Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.

When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message appears,certain services, checks, and inspections are required.Required services are described in the following for“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,it is recommended that your first service beMaintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance IIthereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance IImay be required more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGEENGINE OIL message comes on within 10 months sincethe vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II wasperformed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previousservice performed was Maintenance I. Always useMaintenance II whenever the message comes on10 months or more since the last service or if themessage has not come on at all for one year.

6-4

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-13. Reset oil lifesystem. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16. An Emission ControlService.

• •

Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #. • •Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •For vehicles driven in dusty/dirty conditions: Inspect engine air cleaner filter. Ifnecessary, replace filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18. •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 5-59 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Monthon page 6-9.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” inthis section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. •

6-5

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles(kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(41 500)

50,000(83 000)

75,000(125 000)

100,000(166 000)

125,000(207 500)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damageor leaks. • • • • • •

Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18. •

Change automatic transmission fluidand filter (severe service).See footnote (h).

• • •

Change automatic transmission fluidand filter (normal service). •

Change transfer case fluid. Seefootnote (g). • • •

Replace spark plugs and inspect sparkplug wires. An Emission ControlService.

•

6-6

Additional Required Services (cont’d)

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(41 500)

50,000(83 000)

75,000(125 000)

100,000(166 000)

125,000(207 500)

150,000(240 000)

Engine cooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first). AnEmission Control Service. Seefootnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt. AnEmission Control Service. •

Maintenance Footnotes# Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steeringlinkage, transmission shift linkage, and parkingbrake cable guides. Ball joints should not be lubricatedunless their temperature is 10°F (-12°C) or higher,or they could be damaged.

(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspectdisc brake pads for wear and rotors for surfacecondition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts,signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect power

steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually check constantvelocity joints, rubber boots and axle seals for leaks.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if theyare cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine GM parts asneeded. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure testof the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning theoutside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damagedor that streak or miss areas of the windshield.

6-7

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all yourbelts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchoragesare working properly. Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system parts. If you see anythingthat might keep a safety belt system from doing itsjob, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety beltsreplaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbagcoverings, and have them repaired or replaced.The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latchassembly, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor,release pawl, rear compartment hinges, outer liftgatehandle pivot points, rear door detent link, rollermechanism, liftgate handle pivot points, latch bolt, fueldoor hinge, cargo door hinge, locks, and foldingseat hardware. More frequent lubrication may berequired when exposed to a corrosive environment.Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a cleancloth will make them last longer, seal better, andnot stick or squeak.

SUT spare tire carrier hinge: Inspect for leaks andlubricate if required. Remove the setscrew at the hingecasting and add lubricant, moving the hinge backand forth periodically, until lubricant can be seen comingfrom the setscrew opening. Install setscrew andtighten to 7 ft lb (9 Y). See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 6-12 for what lubricant to use.

(g) Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks andproper installation.

(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if thevehicle is mainly driven under one or more of theseconditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperatureregularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery

service.

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This servicecan be complex; you should have your dealer performthis service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-24 forwhat to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test thecooling system and pressure cap.

(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspected and repaired andthe fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.

6-8

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should be performedat the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,dependability and emission control performance of yourvehicle. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer can assistyou with these checks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to yourvehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shownin Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checks ateach fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oil ifnecessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for furtherdetails.

Notice: It is important to check your oil regularlyand keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep yourengine oil at the proper level can cause damageto your engine not covered by your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See EngineCoolant on page 5-24 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level in the windshieldwasher tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure theyare inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget tocheck the spare tire. See Tires on page 5-52 for furtherdetails. Check to make sure the spare tire is storedsecurely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-68.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileage highwaydrivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System servicenotification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 5-59.

6-9

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regularbrake. See Parking Brake on page 2-35.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready toturn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicleshould start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Ifthe vehicle starts in any other position, contact yourGM Goodwrench® dealer for service.

Automatic Transmission Shift LockControl System Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough roomaround the vehicle. It should be parked on a levelsurface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brakeon page 2-35.Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately ifthe vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN, but donot start the engine. Without applying the regularbrake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)with normal effort. If the shift lever moves outof PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench® dealerfor service.

6-10

Ignition Transmission Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turnthe ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.

• The ignition should turn to LOCK only when theshift lever is in PARK (P).

• The key should come out only in LOCK.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service isrequired.

Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission Park (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, your vehiclecould begin to move. You or others could beinjured and property could be damaged. Makesure there is room in front of your vehicle incase it begins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehicle beginto move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set theparking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: Withthe engine running and transmission inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure fromthe regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Thenrelease the parking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service isrequired.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Take care toclean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debriscan collect.

6-11

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, partnumber or specification may be obtained from yourdealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. GMGoodwrench® oil meets all therequirements for your vehicle. Todetermine the proper viscosity foryour vehicle’s engine, see EngineOil on page 5-13.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use onlyDEX-COOL® Coolant. See EngineCoolant on page 5-24.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

Usage Fluid/LubricantWindshield

Washer Solvent GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid (GM PartNo. U.S. 89021184, in Canada89021186).

AutomaticTransmission

DEXRON®-III AutomaticTransmission Fluid. Look for“Approved for the H-Specification”on the label.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

ChassisLubrication

Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.U.S. 12377985, in Canada88901242) or lubricant meetingrequirements of NLGI #2, CategoryLB or GC-LB.

Front andRear Axle

SAE 75W-90 Synthetic AxleLubricant (GM Part No. U.S.12378261, in Canada 10953455)meeting GM Specification 9986115.

6-12

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Transfer Case

DEXRON®-III AutomaticTransmission Fluid. Look for“Approved for the H-Specification”on the label.

Front AxlePropshaft

Spline

Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12345879, inCanada 10953511) or lubricantmeeting requirements of GM9985830.

Hood HingesMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Usage Fluid/LubricantOuter TailgateHandle Pivot

Points


SUT Spare TireCarrier Hinge


WeatherstripConditioning

Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM PartNo. U.S. 12345579, in Canada992887).

WeatherstripSqueaks

Synthetic Grease with Teflon,Superlube (GM Part No. U.S.12371287, in Canada 10953437).

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number or specification can be obtained from your GM dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco ® Part NumberEngine Air Cleaner/Filter 88944151 —Engine Oil Filter 88984215 PF46Spark Plugs 12571164 41–985

Wiper BladesFront – 17.0 inches (43.0 cm)Rear – 11.0 inches (28.0 cm)

1570639415174476

——

6-13

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additionalinformation from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages. You shouldretain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

6-14

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



6-15

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



6-16

Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2Online Owner Center ......................................7-3Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ................................7-4Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-5Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data

Recorders ..................................................7-9

Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-10Reporting Safety Defects to the United States

Government ..............................................7-10Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian

Government ..............................................7-11Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-11Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-11

Section 7 Customer Assistance and Information

7-1

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are important toyour dealer and to HUMMER. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or the operation of yourvehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or servicedepartments. Sometimes, however, despite the bestintentions of all concerned, misunderstandings canoccur. If your concern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member ofdealership management. Normally, concerns canbe quickly resolved at that level. If the matter hasalready been reviewed with the sales, service or partsmanager, contact the owner of the dealership orthe general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealershipmanagement, it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership without further help, contactthe HUMMER Consumer Relations Manager by calling1-866-HUMMER6 (486-6376), Customer Assistanceprompt. In Canada, contact GM of Canada CustomerCommunication Centre in Oshawa by calling1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order togive your inquiry prompt attention. Please have thefollowing information available to give the CustomerAssistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (This is available fromthe vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the topleft of the instrument panel and visible through thewindshield.)

• Dealership name and location

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage

When contacting HUMMER, please remember that yourconcern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if youhave a concern.

STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealerare committed to making sure you are completelysatisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continueto remain unsatisfied after following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with theBBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additionalrights you may have. Canadian owners refer to yourWarranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet forinformation on the Canadian Motor Vehicle ArbitrationPlan (CAMVAP).

7-2

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court programadministered by the Council of Better Business Bureausto settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Although you may be required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,use of the program is free of charge and your case willgenerally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agreewith the decision given in your case, you may reject it andproceed with any other venue for relief available to you.

Contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the toll-freetelephone number or write them at:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and the Districtof Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves theright to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinueits participation in this program.

Online Owner CenterThe Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownershipneeds. Specific vehicle information can be found inone place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:

• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specific vehicle,including tips and videos and an electronicversion of this owner’s manual (United States only).

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history andmaintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privileges onlyavailable to members (United States only).

Refer to the web for updated information.

To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com(United States) or My GM Canada withinwww.gmcanada.com (Canada).

7-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, orspeech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),HUMMER has TTY equipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY user can communicatewith HUMMER by dialing: 1-800-833-6537. (TTY usersin Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesHUMMER encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishesto write to HUMMER, the letter should be addressed toHUMMER’s Customer Assistance Center.

United States – Customer AssistanceHUMMER Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33177Detroit, MI 48232-5177

1-866-HUMMER6 (1-866-486-6376)1-800-833-6537 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-866-HUMMER6

(1-866-486-6376)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada – Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

7-4

Overseas – Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General Motors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries (ExceptPuerto Rico and U.S. VirginIslands) – Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgramThis program, available to qualified applicants, canreimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible aftermarketdriver’s or passenger’s adaptive equipment you mayrequire for your vehicle, such as hand controls andwheelchair/scooter lifts.

The offer is available for a limited period of time fromthe date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more details, orto determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visitgmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-800-833-9935.

GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

7-5

Roadside Assistance ProgramAs the owner of a new HUMMER vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the HUMMER RoadsideAssistance program. This value-added service isintended to provide peace of mind as you drive in thecity or travel the open road. Call 1-866-HUMMER6(486-6376) 24 hours a day, 365 days a year to speakwith a HUMMER Roadside Assistance Representative.

We will provide the following services during theBumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expenseto you:

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel($5 maximum) for the customer to get to thenearest service station.

• Lock-out Service (identification required):Replacement keys or locksmith service willbe covered at no charge if you are unable to gainentry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacementkey will be covered within 10 miles (16 km).

• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership forwarranty service or in the event of avehicle-disabling accident.

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will becovered at no charge. The customer is responsiblefor the repair or replacement of the tire if notcovered by a warrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require abattery jump start will be covered at no charge.

• Dealer Locator Service Directions to the nearestdealer.

• Trip Routing: A Roadside AssistanceRepresentative can provide specific informationregarding this feature.

• Trip Interruption Expense Benefits: A RoadsideAssistance Representative can provide specificinformation regarding this feature.

In many instances, mechanical failures are coveredunder HUMMER’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty.However, when other services are utilized, our RoadsideAssistance Representatives will explain any paymentobligations you might incur.

7-6

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, pleaseprovide the following to the Roadside AssistanceRepresentative:

• Your name, home address, and home telephonenumber.

• Telephone number of your location.

• Location of the vehicle.

• Model, year, color, and license plate number of thevehicle.

• Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) anddelivery date of the vehicle.

• Description of the problem.

While we hope you never have the occasion to use ourservice, it is added security while traveling for youand your family. Remember, we are only a phone callaway. HUMMER Roadside Assistance:1-866-HUMMER6 (486-6376), text telephone (TTY)users, call 1-888-889-2438.

HUMMER reserves the right to limit services orreimbursement to an owner or driver when, inHUMMER’s judgement, the claims become excessive infrequency or type of occurrence.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in thecoverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.HUMMER reserves the right to make any changes ordiscontinue the Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Canadian Roadside AssistanceVehicles purchased in Canada have an extensiveroadside assistance program accessible from anywherein Canada or the United States. Please refer to theWarranty and Owner Assistance Information book.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we and ourparticipating dealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer support program for newvehicles.

The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retailpurchase/lease customers in conjunction with theBumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation optionsare available when warranty repairs are required. This willreduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs.

7-7

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service, you shouldcontact your dealer and request an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointment and advisingyour service consultant of your transportation needs,your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the servicedepartment immediately, keep driving it until it can bescheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem issafety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, letthem know this, and ask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle offfor service, you are urged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow for the same day repair.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completed while youwait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize your inconvenience by providing severaltransportation options. Depending on the circumstances,your dealer can offer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceParticipating dealers can provide you with shuttleservice to get you to your destination with minimalinterruption of your daily schedule. This includesone-way or round trip shuttle service to a destination upto 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires warranty repairs, reimbursementof public transportation expenses may be available,for up to a maximum of five days. In addition, should youarrange transportation through a friend or relative,reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may beavailable, up to a five-day maximum. Claim amountsshould reflect actual costs and be supported by originalreceipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesyrental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warrantyrepair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximumamount per day and must be supported by receipts. Thisrequires that you sign and complete a rental agreementand meet state, local and rental vehicle providerrequirements. Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements, insurance coverage, creditcard, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage chargesand may also be responsible for taxes, levies,usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyondthe completion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as acourtesy rental.

7-8

Additional Program InformationCourtesy Transportation is available during theBumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it isnot part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Aseparate booklet entitled Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverage information.

Courtesy Transportation is available only at participatingdealers and all program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available at every dealer. Pleasecontact your dealer for specific information aboutavailability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangementswill be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.

Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs duringthe Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the GeneralMotors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,alternative transportation may be available under theCourtesy Transportation Program. Please consultyour dealer for details.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation atany time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibilitypursuant to the terms and conditions describedherein at its sole discretion.

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has anumber of sophisticated computer systems that monitorand control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitoremission control components to optimize fuel economy,to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if soequipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help thedriver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.Some information may be stored during regularoperations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;other information is stored only in a crash event bycomputer systems, such as those commonly called eventdata recorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as the AirbagSensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehiclemay record information about the condition of the vehicleand how it was operated, such as data related toengine speed, brake application, throttle position, vehiclespeed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbagperformance, and the severity of a collision. Thisinformation has been used to improve vehicle crashperformance and may be used to improve crashperformance of future vehicles and driving safety. Unlikethe data recorders on many airplanes, these on-boardsystems do not record sounds, such as conversation ofvehicle occupants.

7-9

To read this information, special equipment is neededand access to the vehicle or the device that storesthe data is required. GM will not access informationabout a crash event or share it with others other than:

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,

• in response to an official request of police or similargovernment office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through thediscovery process, or

• as required by law.

In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research where appropriateconfidentiality is to be maintained and need isshown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to a specificvehicle with non-GM organizations for researchpurposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may have access tothe special equipment that can read the informationif they have access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data.

If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please checkthe OnStar® subscription service agreement ormanual for information on its operations and datacollection.

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect which couldcause a crash or could cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists ina group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, your dealer, orGeneral Motors.

7-10

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto SafetyHotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inthe Washington, D.C. area) or write to:

NHTSA, U.S. Department of TransportationWashington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from the hotline.

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehiclehas a safety defect, you should immediately notifyTransport Canada, in addition to notifying GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. You may call them at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaPlace de Ville Tower C330 Sparks StreetOttawa, Ontario K1A 0N5

Reporting Safety Defects to GeneralMotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) ina situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.Please call us at 1-866-HUMMER6 (486-6376), or write:

HUMMER Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33177Detroit, MI 48232-5177

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axle suspension,brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

7-11

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repair serviceprocedures, adjustments, and specifications for GMtransmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service General Motors carsand trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions toassist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.

In Canada, information pertaining to Product ServiceBulletins can be obtained by contacting your GeneralMotors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483).

Owner’s InformationOwner publications are written specifically for ownersand intended to provide basic operational informationabout the vehicle. The owner’s manual will includethe Maintenance Schedule for all models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, andWarranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00

Current and Past Model Order FormsService Publications are available for current andpast model GM vehicles. To request an order form,please specify year and model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on theWorld Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice and withoutincurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to makechecks payable in U.S. funds.

7-12

AAccessory Inflator ........................................... 5-65Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-19Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................... 1-69Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 5-100Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-18Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-20Air Suspension ............................................... 4-67Airbag

Off Light ..................................................... 3-30Readiness Light .......................................... 3-29

Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-9Airbag System ................................................ 1-58

Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle ................................................... 1-69

Airbag Off Switch ........................................ 1-65How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-63Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-68What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-63What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-64When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-61Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-60

All-Wheel Drive ............................................... 5-43All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System ......................... 2-31Antenna, Fixed Mast ....................................... 3-92Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 4-7

Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-34Appearance Care ............................................ 5-90

Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-96Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-93Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-97Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-94Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 5-90Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-92Finish Care ................................................. 5-95Finish Damage ............................................ 5-97Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic

Surfaces ................................................. 5-93Leather ...................................................... 5-92Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-97Speaker Covers .......................................... 5-93Tires .......................................................... 5-96Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-97Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-98Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-94Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-93Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ....... 5-95Wood Panels .............................................. 5-93

Ashtrays ........................................................ 3-19Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-60

Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 3-89Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................ 3-91Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-92Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-92Chime Level Adjustment ............................... 3-92

1

Audio System(s) (cont.)Fixed Mast Antenna ..................................... 3-92Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation

Manual ................................................... 3-87Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-61Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-74Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................................ 3-87Setting the Time .......................................... 3-60Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ 3-89Understanding Radio Reception ..................... 3-90

Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-16Automatic Transmission

Fluid .......................................................... 5-21Operation ................................................... 2-27

BBattery .......................................................... 5-38

Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-18Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-45Bench Seat, Split (60/40) ................................... 1-7Brake

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 4-7Emergencies ................................................ 4-8Parking ...................................................... 2-35System Warning Light .................................. 3-32

Brakes .......................................................... 5-35Braking ........................................................... 4-6Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8

Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-24Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-45

Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 5-47Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ............. 5-47Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-45Headlamps ................................................. 5-46Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-50Roof Marker Lamps ..................................... 5-48Taillamps .................................................... 5-49

Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-61

CCalifornia Fuel .................................................. 5-5Canadian Owners ................................................ iiCapacities and Specifications .......................... 5-110Carbon Monoxide ........................... 2-11, 2-12, 2-14,

2-38, 4-48, 4-68Care of

Safety Belts ................................................ 5-93Your Cassette Tape Player ............................ 3-91Your CD Player ........................................... 3-92Your CDs ................................................... 3-92

Cargo Area, All-Weather .................................. 2-56Cargo Tie Downs ............................................ 2-56Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-52Center Overhead Console ................................ 2-51Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-65Charging System Light .................................... 3-31

2

CheckEngine Light ............................................... 3-37

Checking Things Under the Hood ....................... 5-9Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-97Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-42Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-39Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) .......................... 1-49Older Children ............................................. 1-36Securing a Child Restraint Designed for

the LATCH System ................................... 1-51Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Seat Position ........................................... 1-52Securing a Child Restraint in the Right

Front Seat Position ................................... 1-54Top Strap ................................................... 1-46Top Strap Anchor Location ............................ 1-47Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-45

Chime Level Adjustment .................................. 3-92Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-19Cleaning

Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-96Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................. 5-94Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-92Finish Care ................................................. 5-95Inside of Your Vehicle .................................. 5-90Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ....................................... 5-93

Cleaning (cont.)Leather ...................................................... 5-92Speaker Covers .......................................... 5-93Tires .......................................................... 5-96Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-97Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-94Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-93Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ....... 5-95Wood Panels .............................................. 5-93

Climate Control SystemClimate Controls Personalization .................... 3-26Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-20Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-25

Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ..................... 1-33Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-21Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-35Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-26Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-26

Cooling System .............................................. 5-29Cruise Control ................................................ 3-10Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-41Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-4Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4

3

Customer Assistance Information (cont.)Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-5Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ........................................ 7-11Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .............................. 7-11Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ......................... 7-10Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-11

DDaytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-15Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2Delayed Locking ............................................... 2-9Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4Dome Lamps ................................................. 3-18Door

Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-9Locks .......................................................... 2-8Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-9Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-10

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-22

Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-43DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-44DIC Vehicle Customization ............................ 3-54DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-47

DrivingAt Night ..................................................... 4-39City ........................................................... 4-43Defensive ..................................................... 4-2Drunken ....................................................... 4-2First Aid and Tool Kit ................................... 4-55Freeway ..................................................... 4-44Front Mounted Receiver ............................... 4-56Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-46In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-40Off-Road .................................................... 4-16Power Winch Platform .................................. 4-57Recovery Loops .......................................... 4-53Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-53Winter ........................................................ 4-48

Dual Automatic Climate Control System ............. 3-20

4

EElectrical System

Add-On Equipment ..................................... 5-100Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ............. 5-104Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-101Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-101Power Windows and Other Power Options .... 5-100Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-105Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................. 5-100

Electronically Controlled Air SuspensionSystem ...................................................... 4-67

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-18Battery ....................................................... 5-38Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-37Coolant ...................................................... 5-24Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-26Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-35Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12Exhaust ..................................................... 2-38Oil ............................................................. 5-13Oil Life System ........................................... 5-16Overheated Protection Operating Mode ........... 5-28Overheating ................................................ 5-26Starting ...................................................... 2-25

Entry/Exit Lighting ........................................... 3-18Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................. 7-9Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-35Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-13

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-18Finish Damage ............................................... 5-97First Aid Kit .................................................... 4-55Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 3-92Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-8Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-67Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-68Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-84Fluid

Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-21Power Steering ........................................... 5-33Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-34

Front Axle ...................................................... 5-44Front Mounted Receiver ................................... 4-56Fuel ............................................................... 5-5

Additives ...................................................... 5-6California Fuel .............................................. 5-5

5

Fuel (cont.)Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..................... 5-9Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-7Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-6Gage ......................................................... 3-42Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-43

FusesCenter Instrument Panel Fuse Block ............. 5-104Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-101Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-101Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-105Windshield Wiper ....................................... 5-100

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-35Fuel .......................................................... 3-42Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-40Speedometer .............................................. 3-28Tachometer ................................................. 3-28Transmission Temperature ............................. 3-35Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 3-32

Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-47

GasolineOctane ........................................................ 5-5Specifications ............................................... 5-5

Glove Box ..................................................... 2-51GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-5

HHazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6Head Restraints ............................................... 1-6Headlamps .................................................... 5-46

Automatic Headlamp System ......................... 3-16Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-45Daytime Running Lamps ....................... 3-15, 5-47Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ............. 5-47Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-45High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8On Reminder .............................................. 3-15Roof Marker Lamps ..................................... 5-48

Heated Seats ................................................... 1-4Heater ........................................................... 3-20Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-41Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-46Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-46HomeLink® Wireless Control System .................. 2-47HomeLink® Wireless Control System Operation ..... 2-48

6

HoodChecking Things Under .................................. 5-9Release ..................................................... 5-10

Horn ............................................................... 3-6How to Use This Manual ...................................... iiHow to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-22

IIgnition Positions ............................................. 2-24Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-39Inflation -- Tire Pressure .................................. 5-58Instrument Panel

Brightness .................................................. 3-17Cluster ....................................................... 3-27Overview ..................................................... 3-4

JJump Starting ................................................. 5-39

KKeyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4Keys ............................................................... 2-3

LLabelling, Tire Sidewall .................................... 5-53Lamps

Battery Run-Down Protection ......................... 3-18Dome ........................................................ 3-18Exterior ...................................................... 3-13Off-Road .................................................... 3-17Reading ..................................................... 3-18

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ........................................... 1-49Securing a Child Restraint Designed for

the LATCH System ................................... 1-51Liftgate .......................................................... 2-11Light

Airbag Off .................................................. 3-30Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-29Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-34Brake System Warning ................................. 3-32Charging System ......................................... 3-31Cruise Control ............................................. 3-41Highbeam On ............................................. 3-41Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-43Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-37Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-28Security ..................................................... 3-41Tow/Haul Mode ........................................... 3-42Traction Off ................................................ 3-34

7

LightingEntry/Exit ................................................... 3-18

Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-58Locking Rear Axle ........................................... 4-10Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-11Locks

Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-9Door ........................................................... 2-8Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-11Power Door .................................................. 2-9Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-10

Loss of Control ............................................... 4-15Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-43Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-52Lumbar

Power Controls ............................................. 1-3

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-9At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-10Introduction .................................................. 6-2Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7Maintenance Record .................................... 6-14Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2

Maintenance Schedule (cont.)Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-13Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-9Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4Using .......................................................... 6-3Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2

Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-37Memory Seat ................................................. 2-61Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-47Midgate ......................................................... 2-12Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar®,Compass and Temperature Display ............. 2-40

Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror withCurb View Assist ...................................... 2-44

Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-43Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-44Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-42

MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3

NNavigation/Radio System, see Navigation

Manual ...................................................... 3-87New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-24Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-13

8

OOdometer ...................................................... 3-28Off-Road Driving ............................................. 4-16Off-Road Lamps ............................................. 3-17Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-13Oil

Engine ....................................................... 5-13Pressure Gage ............................................ 3-40

Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 5-16Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-36Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-45Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-25Outside

Automatic Dimming Mirror with CurbView Assist ............................................. 2-44

Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-43Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-44Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-42

Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ..... 5-28Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-9Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii

PPark (P)

Shifting Into ................................................ 2-36Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-37

ParkingBrake ........................................................ 2-35Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-37

Passing ......................................................... 4-13Passlock® ...................................................... 2-23Personalization, Climate Controls ...................... 3-26Power

Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-19Door Locks .................................................. 2-9Electrical System ....................................... 5-100Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-3Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-25Seat ............................................................ 1-2Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-33Windows .................................................... 2-18

Power Winch Platform ..................................... 4-57Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-10

9

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-21

RRadios .......................................................... 3-60

Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................ 3-91Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-92Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-92Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation

Manual ................................................... 3-87Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-61Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-74Rear Seat Audio .......................................... 3-87Setting the Time .......................................... 3-60Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-89Understanding Reception .............................. 3-90

Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-18Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-44

Locking ...................................................... 4-10Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-10Rear Heated Seats ........................................... 1-7Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-33Rear Seat Armrest .......................................... 2-56Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................... 3-87Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-30

Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming withOnStar®, Compass and Temperature Display ..... 2-40

Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-5Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12Recovery Loops .............................................. 4-53Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-64Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-4Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-5Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire .................................................. 5-77Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-69Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-50Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government .................................. 7-11General Motors ........................................... 7-11United States Government ............................ 7-10

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-69Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash .......................................... 1-70Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-25Ride Height, Selectable Extended Rear Ride ...... 4-66Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-30Roadside

Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-53Running the Engine While Parked ..................... 2-38

10

SSafety Belt

Reminder Light ............................................ 3-28Safety Belts

Care of ...................................................... 5-93Driver Position ............................................ 1-22How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-22Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-21Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for

Children and Small Adults ......................... 1-33Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-30Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-30Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-35Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-29Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-16

Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iiiScheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4Seats

60/40 Split Bench Seat .................................. 1-7Head Restraints ............................................ 1-6Heated Seats ............................................... 1-4Heated Seats, Rear ....................................... 1-7Memory ..................................................... 2-61Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-3Power Seats ................................................. 1-2Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-5Third Row Seat ........................................... 1-10

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCH System ................... 1-51Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-52Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-54

Security Light ................................................. 3-41Selectable Extended Rear Ride Height ............... 4-66Service ........................................................... 5-3

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour Vehicle .............................................. 5-5

Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-37Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-11

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-68Setting the Time ............................................. 3-60Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-97Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-36Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-37Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-7Spare Tire ..................................................... 5-89

Accessory Inflator ........................................ 5-65Installing .................................................... 5-77Removing ................................................... 5-69Storing ....................................................... 5-84

Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-110Speedometer .................................................. 3-28Split Bench Seat (60/40) .................................... 1-7Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-25Steering ........................................................ 4-11

11

Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-89Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6Storage Areas

All-Weather Cargo Area ................................ 2-56Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-52Center Overhead Console ............................. 2-51Glove Box .................................................. 2-51Luggage Carrier .......................................... 2-52Rear Seat Armrest ....................................... 2-56

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-52Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-21Sunroof ......................................................... 2-59Suspension .................................................... 4-67

TTachometer .................................................... 3-28Tailgate ......................................................... 2-14Taillamps ....................................................... 5-49Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-89Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-21

Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-21Passlock® ................................................... 2-23

Third Row Seat .............................................. 1-10Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6Tires ............................................................. 5-52

Accessory Inflator ........................................ 5-65Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning .......................... 5-96

Tires (cont.)Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-61Chains ....................................................... 5-65Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-68Cleaning .................................................... 5-96If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-67Inflation -- Tire Pressure ............................... 5-58Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-59Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-77Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-77Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-69Spare Tire .................................................. 5-89Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-84Tire Sidewall Labelling .................................. 5-53Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-56Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-62Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-63Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-64When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-61

Tonneau Cover ............................................... 2-58Tool Kit ......................................................... 4-55Top Strap ...................................................... 1-46Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-47Tow/Haul Mode ............................................... 2-30Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................... 3-42Towing

Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-64Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-68Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-64

12

TractionControl System (TCS) .................................... 4-9Off Light ..................................................... 3-34

TrailerRecommendations ....................................... 4-68

TransmissionFluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-21Temperature Gage ....................................... 3-35

Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-27Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-7Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7

UUnderstanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-90Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-62

VVehicle

Control ........................................................ 4-5Damage Warnings ........................................... ivLoading ...................................................... 4-58Symbols ......................................................... iv

Vehicle Customization, DIC .............................. 3-54

Vehicle Data Collection and Event DataRecorders .................................................... 7-9

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) ............................................. 5-99Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-99

Vehicle PersonalizationMemory Seat .............................................. 2-61

Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-25Visors ........................................................... 2-21Voltmeter Gage .............................................. 3-32

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-26Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-47Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6Safety and Symbols ......................................... iiiVehicle Damage .............................................. iv

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-63Replacement ............................................... 5-64

Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-45Windows ....................................................... 2-17

Power ........................................................ 2-18

13

WindshieldBackglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning .......... 5-95

Windshield Washer ........................................... 3-9Fluid .......................................................... 5-34

Windshield WiperBlade Replacement ...................................... 5-51Fuses ...................................................... 5-100Windshield Wipers ......................................... 3-9

Winter Driving ................................................ 4-48

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2

14

2005 HUMMER H2 Owner Manual M - gm.ca - General · PDF file2005 HUMMER H2 Owner Manual M....

Documents

Transcript of 2005 HUMMER H2 Owner Manual M - gm.ca - General · PDF file2005 HUMMER H2 Owner Manual M....